school of health sciences - imcc€¦ · ii academic calendar - academic session 2019/2020 for all...

HE

ALT

H S

CIE

NC

E A

ND

SC

IEN

CE

SCHOOL OF HEALTHSCIENCESBachelor of Health Science andBachelor of Science

Transforming Higher Educationfor a Sustainable Tomorrow

BACHELOR OF

HEALTH SCIENCE (Audiology/Biomedicine/

Dietetics/Environmental and

Occupational Health/Exercise

and Sports Science/Medical

Radiation/Nutrition/Speech

Pathology)

SCIENCE (Forensic Science)

Academic Session

2019/2020

BACHELOR OF

Health Science

(Audiology/Biomedicine/

Dietetics/Environmental and

Occupational Health/Exercise

and Sports Science/Medical

Radiation/Nutrition/Speech

Pathology)

Science (Forensic Science) Academic Session 2019/2020

i

CONTENT

PAGE

I.

II.

III.

CONTENT

ACADEMIC CALENDAR

SCHOOL STAFF LIST

i

ii

iii-ix

1.0 INTRODUCTION 1

2.0 ACADEMIC SYSTEM & GENERAL INFORMATION 2 - 25

3.0 UNIVERSITY COURSE REQUIREMENTS 26 - 37

4.0 COURSES AND PROGRAMMES OFFERED IN SCHOOL

OF HEALTH SCIENCES

38 - 39

5.0 PROGRAMMES 40

5.1. Bachelor of Health Science (Audiology)…………………….. 40 - 43

5.2. Bachelor of Health Science (Biomedicine)..…….……….. 44 - 47

5.3. Bachelor of Health Science (Dietetics)……………………. 48 - 51

5.4. Bachelor of Health Science (Environmental and

Occupational Health) …………………………………….

52 - 55

5.5. Bachelor of Health Science (Exercise and Sports Science).. 56 - 61

5.6. Bachelor of Health Science (Medical Radiation)………… 62 - 65

5.7. Bachelor of Health Science (Nutrition)…….……………. 66 - 69

5.8. Bachelor of Health Science (Speech Pathology)…………….. 70 - 73

5.9 Bachelor of Science (Forensic Science)………………...... 74 - 77

6.0 COURSE SYNOPSIS 78 - 180

6.1. Foundation Courses ………..…………………………….. 78 - 81

6.2. Core Courses Level 1…….............……………….……… 82 - 95

6.3. Core Courses Level 2……..…………...................………. 96 - 121

6.4. Core Courses Level 3……..………………….................... 122 - 148

6.5. Core Courses Level 4…………………………………….. 149 - 165

6.6 Elective Courses………………………………………….. 166 - 180

7.0 FACILITIES 181

8.0 GENERAL INFORMATION 181 - 184

8.1. Career Guidance ………………………………………… 181 - 184

8.2. Prizes, Awards and Dean's List ………….…………….. 184

8.3. Society …………….….………………………………… 184

8.4. Postgraduate Programmes…………………….…………. 185

8.5. Overseas Training Scheme …………………………….. 185

ii

ACADEMIC CALENDAR - ACADEMIC SESSION 2019/2020

FOR ALL SCHOOLS (EXCEPT THE SCHOOL OF MEDICAL SCIENCES AND SCHOOL OF DENTAL SCIENCES) *Registration for New Students (1 & 2 September 2019) / Orientation Week 03-06 September 2019)

SEM WEEK ACTIVITY DATE REMARKS

ON

E

1

Teaching & Learning Period

(7 Weeks)

Sunday, 08.09.2019 - Thursday, 12.09.2019 09.09.2019, Monday-Agong’s Birthday

2 Sunday, 15.09.2019 - Thursday, 19.09.2019 16.09.2019, Monday-Malaysia Day

3 Sunday, 22.09.2019 - Thursday, 26.09.2019

4 Sunday, 29.09.2019 - Thursday, 03.10.2019

5 Sunday, 06.10.2019 - Thursday, 10.10.2019

6 Sunday, 13.10.2019 - Thursday, 17.10.2019

7 Sunday, 20.10.2019 - Thursday, 24.10.2019

8 Mid Semester Break Friday, 25.10.2019 - Saturday, 02.11.2019 27.10.2019, Sunday-Deepavali**

9 Sunday, 03.11.2019 - Thursday, 07.11.2019 09.11.2019, Saturday-Maulidur Rasul

10


(7 Weeks)

Sunday, 10.11.2019 - Thursday, 14.11.2019 11 & 12.11.2019, Monday & Tuesday-

11 Sunday, 17.11.2019 - Thursday, 21.11.2019 Sultan Kelantan’s Birthday

12 Sunday, 24.11.2019 - Thursday, 28.11.2019

13 Sunday, 01.12.2019 - Thursday, 05.12.2019

14 Sunday, 08.12.2019 - Thursday, 12.12.2019

15 Sunday, 15.12.2019 - Thursday, 19.12.2019

16 Revision Week Friday, 20.12.2019 - Saturday, 28.12.2019 25.12.2019, Wednesday-Christmas

17 Examinations

(3 Weeks)

Sunday, 29.12.2019 - Thursday, 02.01.2020

18 Sunday, 05.01.2020 - Thursday, 09.01.2020

19 Sunday, 12.01.2020 - Thursday, 16.01.2020

20

Mid Semester Break (4 Weeks)

,

21 Friday, 17.01.2020 - Saturday, 15.02.2020 25 & 26.01.2020, Saturday & Sunday-Chineese New Year

22 ,

23

TWO

1/24


(7 Weeks)

Sunday, 16.02.2020 - Thursday, 20.02.2020

2/25 Sunday, 23.02.2020 - Thursday, 27.02.2020

3/26 Sunday, 01.03.2020 - Thursday, 05.03.2020

4/27 Sunday, 08.03.2020 - Thursday, 12.03.2020

5/28 Sunday, 15.03.2020 - Thursday, 19.03.2020

6/29 Sunday, 22.03.2020 - Thursday, 26.03.2020

7/30 Sunday, 29.03.2020 - Thursday, 02.04.2020

8/31 Mid Semester Break Friday, 03.04.2020 - Saturday, 11.04.2020

9/32


(7 Weeks)

Sunday, 12.04.2020 - Thursday, 16.04.2020

10/33 Sunday, 19.04.2020 - Thursday, 23.04.2020

11/34 Sunday, 26.04.2020 - Thursday, 30.04.2020 01.05.2020, Friday-Labour Day

12/35 Sunday, 03.05.2020 - Thursday, 07.05.2020 07.05.2020, Thursday-Wesak Day

13/36 Sunday, 10.05.2020 - Thursday, 14.05.2020 10.05.2020, Sunday-Nuzul Al-Quran

14/37 Sunday, 17.05.2020 - Thursday, 21.05.2020

15/38 Sunday, 24.05.2020 - Thursday, 28.05.2020 24 & 25.05.2020, Sunday & Monday- Hari Raya Aidilfitri**

16/39 Revision Week Sunday, 31.05.2020 - Thursday, 04.06.2020

17/40 Examinations Sunday, 07.06.2020 - Thursday, 11.06.2020

18/41 (3 Weeks) Sunday, 14.06.2020 - Thursday, 18.06.2020

19/42 Sunday, 21.06.2020 - Thursday, 25.06.2020

*KSC

P

20/43 Sunday, 28.06.2020 - Thursday, 02.07.2020 31.07.2020 & 01.08.2020, Friday & Saturday- Hari Raya Aidiladha

21/44 Long Vacation/ Industrial Sunday, 05.07.2020 - Thursday, 09.07.2020

Training/KSCP*

(10 Weeks)

22/45 Sunday, 12.07.2020 - Thursday, 16.07.2020

23/46 Sunday, 19.07.2020 - Thursday, 23.07.2020

24/47 *T&LP Sunday, 26.07.2020 - Thursday, 30.07.2020

25/48 Sunday, 02.08.2020 - Thursday, 06.08.2020

26/49 *Examination Sunday, 09.08.2020 - Thursday, 13.08.2020

27/50 Sunday, 16.08.2020 - Thursday, 20.08.2020 20.08.2020, Thursday-Awal Muharram

28/51 Sunday, 23.08.2020 - Thursday, 27.08.2020

29/52 Sunday, 30.08.2020 - Thursday, 03.09.2020 31.08.2020, Monday-National Day

*Courses during the Long Vacation (KSCP) **This Academic Calendar is subject to change

iii

SCHOOL STAFF LIST

TEL: 609-767 7509/7510/7516/7517/7518/7519/7520 FAX: 609-7677515

NO. NAME POSITION EXT. EMAIL

1. Professor Dr. Norazmi

Mohd Nor

Dean/Lecturer 7500/7784 [email protected]

2. Associate Professor

Dr. Ahmad Fahmi Lim

Abdullah

Deputy Dean

(Academic & Student

Affairs)/Lecturer

7596/7783 [email protected]


Dr. Rapeah Suppian

Deputy Dean

(Postgraduate, Career &

International)/ Lecturer



Dr. Hairul Anuar Hashim

Deputy Dean

(Research, Inovation &

Industry-Community

Engagement)/Lecturer


AUDIOLOGY AND SPEECH PATHOLOGY PROGRAMME


1. Dr. Nik Fariza Husna

Nik Hassan

Programme Chairman

/Medical Lecturer

7805 [email protected]


Dr. Mohd Normani Zakaria

Lecturer 7646 [email protected]

3. Mr. Khairy Anuar

Mohd Khairuddin


4. Mr. Mahamad Almyzan

Awang


5. Dr. Affizal Ahmad Lecturer 7595 [email protected]

6. Dr. Wan Najibah

Wan Mohamad

Lecturer 7691 wannajibahwanmohamad

@usm.my

7. Dr. Zuraida Zainun Medical Lecturer 7559 [email protected]

8. Ms. Aimi Syahidah

Zulkipli


9. Ms. Aw Cheu Lih Lecturer 7786 [email protected]

10. Ms. Azlinda Abd. Ghani Lecturer 7592 [email protected]

11. Ms. Maziah Romli Lecturer 7691 [email protected]

BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME


1. Professor Dr. Shaharum

Shamsuddin

Programme Chairman

/Lecturer


2. Professor Dr. Norazmi

Mohd Nor

Dean/Lecturer 7500/7784 [email protected]


Dr. Rapeah Suppian

Deputy Dean

(Postgraduate, Career

& International)/

Lecturer


mailto:[email protected]





iv




Dr. See Too Wei Cun

Coordinator

(Postgraduate-

Biomedicine Mixed

Mode Programme)

/Lecturer



Dr. Farid Che Ghazali



Dr. Lim Boon Huat



Dr. Few Ling Ling



Dr. Nurul Asma Abdullah


9. Dr. Ezzeddin Kamil

Mohamed Hashim


10. Dr. Idris Long Lecturer 7778 [email protected]

11. Dr. Mohd Dasuki

Haji Sul’ain


12. Dr. Noor Izani Noor Jamil Lecturer 7604 [email protected]

13. Dr. Wan Amir Nizam

Wan Ahmad


14. Dr. Wong Weng Kin Lecturer 7671 [email protected]

15. Mr. Ab. Rashid Jusoh Lecturer 7531 [email protected]

16. Mr. Zamri Ibrahim Lecturer 7543 [email protected]

17. Dr. Hermizi Hapidin Lecturer 7634 [email protected]

18. Dr. Maryam Azlan Lecturer 7836 [email protected]

19. Dr. Nik Norliza

Nik Hassan


20. Dr. Nik Siti Hanifah

Nik Ahmad


21. Dr. Nor Fazila Che Mat Lecturer 7768 [email protected]

22. Dr. Noraini Abdul Ghafar Lecturer 7837 [email protected]

23. Dr. Nurhidanatasha

Abu Bakar


24. Dr. Nur Salwani Bakar Lecturer 7635 [email protected]

25. Dr. Nur Syahmina Rasudin Lecturer 7553 [email protected]

26. Dr. Rozieyati

Mohamed Saleh


27. Dr. Sabreena Safuan Lecturer 7823 [email protected]

28. Dr. Salmi Ab. Aziz Lecturer 7547 [email protected]

29. Dr. Tan Suat Cheng Lecturer 7776 [email protected]

30. Dr. Tee Get Bee @ Yvonne Lecturer 7597 [email protected]

31. Dr. Wan Ezumi Mohd

Puad @ Mohd Fuad
















v



32. Dr. Wan Nor Azilah @

Wan Nor Amilah Wan

Abdul Wahab


33. Dr. Yusmazura Zakaria Lecturer 7781 [email protected]

34. Dr. Zuraidah Abdullah Lecturer 7556 [email protected]

NUTRITION AND DIETETICS PROGRAMME


1. Dr. Marina Abdul Manaf Programme Chairman

/Lecturer


2. Professor Dr. Wan Rosli

Wan Ishak @ Wan Ahmad



Dr. Foo Leng Huat



Dr. Hamid Jan Jan

Mohamed



Dr. Shariza Abdul Razak


6. Dr. Divya A/P Vanoh Lecturer [email protected]

7. Dr. Hafzan Haji Yusoff Lecturer 7822 [email protected]

8. Dr. Norfarizan Hanoon

Noor Azmi


9. Dr. Reena K.

Vijayakumaran


10. Dr. Soo Kah Leng Lecturer 7631 [email protected]

11. Dr. Wan Faizah

Wan Yusof


12. Ms. Juliana Shamsudin Lecturer 7632 [email protected]

13. Ms. Nur-Fazimah Sahran Lecturer 7637 [email protected]

EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE PROGRAMME



Dr. Ooi Foong Kiew

Programme Chairman

/Lecturer



Dr. Hairul Anuar Hashim

Deputy Dean (Research, Inovation &

Industry-Community Engagement) /Lecturer


3. Dr. Ayu Suzailiana

Muhamad

Coordinator

(Postgraduate-Sport

Science Coursework

Programme)/Lecturer


4. Professor Dr. Chen

Chee Keong









vi

EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE PROGRAMME


5. Professor Dr. Oleksandr

K. Krasilshchikov



Dr. Mohamed Saat Ismail

Lecturer 7602

[email protected]

7. Dr. Adam Abdul Malik Lecturer 7689 [email protected]

8. Dr. Ang Boon Suen Lecturer 7599 [email protected]

9. Dr. Garry Kuan Pei Ern Lecturer 7622 [email protected]

10. Dr. Mohd Nidzam Jawis Lecturer 7608 [email protected]

11. Dr. Mohd Rahimi

Che Jusoh


12. Mr. Erie Zuraidee Zulkifli Lecturer 7558 [email protected]

13. Mr. Nurul Azuar Hamzah Lecturer 7607 [email protected]

14. Dr. Marilyn Ong Li Yin Lecturer 7579 [email protected]

15. Dr. Nur Syamsina Ahmad Lecturer 7647 [email protected]

16. Dr. Rosniwati Ghafar Lecturer 7816 [email protected]

17. Dr. Shazlin Shaharudin Lecturer 7578 [email protected]

18. Dr. Vina Tan Phei Sean Lecturer 7538 [email protected]

FORENSIC SCIENCE PROGRAMME



Dr. Ahmad Fahmi Lim

Abdullah

Deputy Dean

(Academic & Student

Affairs)/Programme

Chairman/Lecturer


2. Professor Dr. Zafarina

Zainuddin



Dr. Geshina Ayu Mat Saat


4. Dr. Noor Zuhartini

Md Muslim

Coordinator

(Forensic Science

Programme)/Lecturer


5. Dr. Wan Nur Syuhaila

Mat Desa

Coordinator

(Postgraduate-Forensic

Science Mixed Mode

Programme)/Lecturer


6. Dr. Chang Kah Haw Lecturer 7624 [email protected]

7. Dr. Dzulkiflee Ismail Lecturer 7820 [email protected]

8. Dr. Edinur Hisham Atan Lecturer 7641 [email protected]

9. Dr. Helmi Mohd Hadi

Pritam


10. Dr. Nik Fakhuruddin

Nik Hassan


11. Dr. Nurasmat Mohd Shukri Lecturer 7563 [email protected]

12. Dr. Nur Haslindawaty

Abd Rashid








vii

FORENSIC SCIENCE PROGRAMME


13. Dr. Seah Lay Hong Lecturer 7561 [email protected]

14. Dr. Nur Waliyuddin

Hanis Zainal Abidin


MEDICAL RADIATION PROGRAMME


1. Ms. Chen Suk Chiang Programme Chairman

/Lecturer


2. Professor Dato’

Dr. Ahmad Hj Zakaria


3. Dr. Mohd Fahmi

Mohd Yusof


4. Dr. Mohammad Khairul

Azhar Abdul Razab


5. Dr. Muhammad Nur

Salihin Yusoff


6. Dr. Marianie Musarudin Lecturer 7636 [email protected]

7. Dr. Wan Nordiana

W. Abd. Rahman


8. Ms. Siti Aishah Abdul Aziz Lecturer 7623 [email protected]

ENVIRONMENTAL & OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMME



Dr. Hasmah Abdullah

Programme Chairman

/Lecturer


2. Dr. Hj. Mohd Nazhari

Hj. Mohd Nawi

Medical Lecturer 7650 [email protected]

3. Dr. Maliki Hapani Lecturer 7625 [email protected]

4. Mr. Mohd Nasrom

Hj. Mohd Nawi


5. Mr. Mohd Noor Mamat Lecturer 7663 [email protected]

6. Dr. Nur Fatien

Muhamad Salleh


7. Dr. Nurulilyana Sansuddin Lecturer 7810 [email protected]

8. Dr. Nurul Ainun Hamzah Lecturer 7804 [email protected]

9. Dr. Nurul Izzah

Abdul Samad


10. Dr. Siti Marwanis Anua Lecturer 7827 [email protected]

11. Pn. Nor Haslina Mohd Lecturer 7828 [email protected]

12. Ms. Faridah Naim (on study leave)


DIPLOMA AND DEGREE NURSING PROGRAMMES


1. Dr. Azlina Yusuf Programme Chairman

/Lecturer











viii



2. Dr. Dariah Mohd Yusoff Coordinator

(Advance Diploma in

Nursing)/Lecturer


3. Dr. Kasmah Wati Pardi Lecturer 7533 [email protected]

4. Dr. Soon Lean Keng Lecturer 7546 [email protected]

5. Dr. Zakira Mamat

@ Mohamed


6. Ms. Duangta A/P Shet Lecturer 7662 [email protected]

7. Ms. Hasni Embong Lecturer 7741 [email protected]

8. Ms. Intan Baiduri Badri Lecturer 7587 [email protected]

9. Ms. Intan Idiana Hassan Lecturer 7636 [email protected]

10. Ms. Jayah K. Pubalan Lecturer 7550 [email protected]

11. Ms. Norazliah

Hj. Samsudin


12. Ms. Norliza Hussin Lecturer 7745 [email protected]

13. Ms. Nur Adibah Solihin

Sulaiman


14. Ms. Salwismawati Badrin Lecturer 7813 [email protected]

15. Ms. Anisah Mat Desa Coordinator

(Diploma in Nursing)

/Tutor


16. Ms. Azlida Abd Kadir Tutor 7733 [email protected]

17. Ms. Fazdillah Husin Tutor 7743 [email protected]

18. Ms. Hartini Muhamad Tutor 7812 [email protected]

19. Ms. Mas Nor Saloni

Ibrahim

Tutor 7732 [email protected]

20. Ms. Nik Asiah Nik Lah Tutor 7735 [email protected]

21. Ms. Nik Nor Azlina Abd.

Kadir

Tutor 7738

[email protected]

22. Ms. Nor Rahan Mohamad Tutor 7780 [email protected]

23. Ms. Norizam Muhammad

Yusof


24. Ms. Noor Jasmani Hassan Tutor 7746 [email protected]

25. Ms. Nurhayati

Muhamad Nor


26. Dr. Siti Aishah

Hj. Ghazali


27. Ms. Tuan Ruasmani Tuan

Daud


28. Ms. Zaihan Ab. Rahman Tutor 7749 [email protected]

29. Ms. Zuraida Yusoff Tutor 7748 [email protected]

30. Ms. Chu Be Lai Clinical Instructor 6672 [email protected]

31. Ms. Halizan Yusoff Clinical Instructor 6672 [email protected]

32. Ms. Masturah Hamzah Clinical Instructor 6672 [email protected]






















ix



33. Ms. Nik Norsuhada Binti

Ab Manaf

Clinical Instructor 7721 [email protected]

34. Ms. Norizan

Che Mohd Yusoff


35. Ms. Wan Azwira Binti

Wan Muhamad Salleh


36. Ms. Zaharah Muhammad Clinical Instructor 6672 [email protected]

INTERDISIPLINARY HEALTH SCIENCES UNIT


1. Dr. Rohani Ismail Coordinator/Lecturer 7789 [email protected]

2. Professor Dato’

Dr. Rashidah Shuib



Dr. Rosminah Mohamed

Lecturer 7586 rosminah_mohamed@usm

.my

4. Dr. David Joseph Pereira Lecturer 7808 [email protected]

5. Dr. Mohd Zulkifli

Abd. Rahim


6. Dr. Mujahid Bakar Lecturer 7788 [email protected]

7. Dr. Rehanah Mohd. Zain Lecturer 7564 [email protected]

The School of Health Sciences is also supported by academic staff from the School of

Medical Sciences, School of Dental Sciences, School of Physics, School of Social

Sciences, School of Mathematics, School of Distance Education and external lecturers

from Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, Universiti Putra Malaysia, the Royal Malaysia

Police, Department of Chemistry Malaysia and the Fire and Rescue Department of

Malaysia.

ADMINISTRATION


1. Mr. Md. Lukmi Ismail Chief Senior Science

Officer (Science Lab)


2. Ms. Wan Suriati Wan Nik Chief Science Officer

(Research)


3. Mr. Hera Juahar Lal

Singh Kishen Singh

Chief Science Officer

(Asset)


4. Mr. Khairul Ithma Mahdi Senior Assistant

Registrar

(Administration &

(Postgraduate Studies)


5. Ms. Hasuaniza Hassan Senior Assistant

Registrar (Academic)





1

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Background

The treatment and prevention of diseases have long been the foundation of conventional

thoughts in matters of health. These thoughts have undergone changes, albeit slowly,

towards the concept of a more holistic management of health, based not only on the biology

of diseases but also incorporating aspects of sociological sciences, behaviour and the

environment. This concept of health takes cognizance of not only the patients’ welfare but

the welfare of the families and society as a whole. Rapid advancement in technology has

helped to hasten these transitions in concepts, methodologies and the way health services

are disbursed. These facts are taken into account during the development of programmes

at the School of Health Sciences established at the Health Campus in Kelantan on the 1st

November 1999. The School’s main objective is to holistically expand the various

disciplines in Health Sciences. Included within the ambit of Health Sciences are areas of

specialties like Biomedicine, Nursing, Environmental and Occupational Health, Dietetics,

Nutrition, Forensic Science, Medical Radiation, Exercise and Sports Science, Audiology

and Speech Pathology teaching both at bachelor and postgraduate levels.

Philosophy

School of Health Sciences holds on to a philosophy that education drives the progress and

development of humankind. The school is committed to fulfil the aspiration by providing

holistic education to produce graduates with integrity as well as the capability to pursue

their own goals and directions in life, in addition to contributing to the development and

progress of Malaysia as an industrialised and civilised nation.

Mission

To achieve and maintain excellence in health sciences by

Producing graduates with a high level of intellectual inquiry and professionalism.

Developing graduates with a strong sense of ethics and commitment to humanity.

Transforming knowledge into an instrument for sustainable development and wellness

of society.

Vision

We are committed to be a centre of excellence in health sciences towards the wellness of

society through intellectual inquiry, creativity, innovation and dissemination of knowledge.

2

2.0 ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION

2.1 Course Registration

Registration of courses is an important activity during the period of study

at the university. It is the first step for the students to sit for the

examination at the end of each semester. Signing up for the right courses

each semester will help to facilitate the graduation of each student from

the first semester till the final semester.

2.1.1 Course Registration Secretariat for the Bachelor’s Degree

and Diploma Programmes

Student Data and Records Unit

Academic Management Division

Registry

Level 1, Chancellory Building

Tel. No. : 04-653 2925/2924/2923

Fax No. : 04-657 4641

E-Mail : [email protected]

Website : http://bpa.usm.my/index.php/ms/

2.1.2 Course Registration Platform

1. E-Daftar (E-Registration)

E-daftar is a platform for online course registration.

The registration is done directly through the

Campusonline portal.

Registration under e-daftar for Semester 1 usually

starts after the release of official examination results

of Semester 2.

For Semester 2, registration will start from after the

Semester 1 official examination results are released

until before Semester 2 begins. Meanwhile for

Courses During the Long Vacation (KSCP) period,

registration will be opened one month after Semester

2 examination.

The date of registration under e-daftar will be

announced to the students during the Revision Week

of every semester and will be displayed in the USM’s

official website.

3

Under e-daftar, students can register for any courses

offered by USM, except co-curriculum courses.

Registration of co-curriculum courses is still placed

under the administration of the Director of the Centre

for Co-Curriculum Programme at the Main Campus or

the Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum Programme at

the Engineering Campus and the Coordinator of the

Co-Curriculum Programme at the Health Campus.

Co-Curriculum courses will be included in the

students’ course registration account prior to the e-

daftar activity, if their pre-registration application is

successful.

Access to E-Daftar System

a. E-daftar System can be accessed through the

Campusonline portal

(https://campusonline.usm.my).

b. Students need to use their USM e-mail ID and

password to access their profile page, which

includes the e-daftar menu.

c. Students need to print the course registration

confirmation slip upon completion of the

registration process or after updating the course

registration list (add/ drop) within the e-daftar

period.

2. Course Registration at Schools/Centres

Registration activities are conducted at the

Schools/Centres and are applicable to students who

are academically active and under Probation (P1/P2)

status. Students who face difficulties registering their

courses during the e-daftar period can register their

courses during the official period of course

registration alternatively.

The official period for registration normally starts on

the first day of the semester until 6th week based on the

Academic Calendar. After this official date, the

registration will be considered late and a penalty of

RM50.00 will be imposed if no reasonable excuse is

given.

https://campusonline.usm.my/

4

After week six, all registration, including adding and

dropping of courses will be administered by the

Examination and Graduation Unit, Academic Management

Division, Registry.

2.1.3 General Guidelines before Students Register for Courses

1. Information and documents required to be referred to

by students before course registration:

a. Refer to the website of the respective school to get

updated information for courses offered or course

registration.

b. Decide on courses to be registered according to

the semester as stipulated in the Study

Programme Guide Book.

c. List the courses to be registered and number of

units (unit value) for each course.

d. Print Cumulative Statement of Grades (Cangred).

e. Check Teaching and Learning Timetable for the

courses that you need to register (to avoid

overlapping in timetable).

f. Read and comprehend the reminders regarding

policies/general requirements for the course

registration.

2. The number of maximum and minimum units that can

be registered in every semester is stated below:

Academic Status PNG Minimum Units Maximum Units

Active 2.00 & Above 9 21

P1

1.99 & Below

9 12

P2 9 10

- Students who meet the minimum period of residency

(6 semesters for a 3 year programme, 7 semesters for

a 3.5 year programme or 8 semesters for a 4 year

programme) are allowed to register courses with a

total of less than 9 units. The semester in which the

student is on leave is not considered for the residency

period.

5

3. Type of course codes during registration:

T = Core courses Grade and number of units

E = Elective courses obtained from these courses

M = Minor courses are considered for graduation

U = University courses

Two (2) other course codes are:

Y = audit courses Grade and number of units obtained

Z = prerequisite courses are not considered for graduation

4. Advice and approval of the Academic Advisor

5. Students are not allowed to register and repeat any

course for which they have achieved a grade 'C' and

above.

2.1.4 Information/Document Given to All Students through

Campus Online Portal (https://campusonline.usm.my)

1. Information of Academic Advisor

2. Academic information such as academic status, GPA

value, CGPA value and year of study

3. Cangred and Course Registration Form

4. List of courses offered by all the schools/centres

5. Teaching and learning timetable for all the

schools/centres/units from all the three campuses

6. List of pre-registered courses which have been added into

the students’ course registration record (if any)

7. Reminders about the university course registration

policies/general requisites

2.1.5 Registration of Language and Co-Curricular Courses

1. Registration of Language courses through e-daftar is

allowed.

a. However, if any problem arises, registration for

language courses can still be carried out/updated

during the official period of OCR at the office of the

School of Languages, Literacies and Translation.

b. All approval/registration/dropping/adding of language

courses is under the responsibility and administration

of the School of Languages, Literacies and

Translation.

6

c. Any problems related to the registration of language

courses can be referred to the School of Languages,

Literacies and Translation. The contact details are as

follows:

General Office : 04-653 4542/

5243/ 5248 for Main

Malay Language Programme Campus

Chairperson : 04-653 3974 students

English Language Programme

Chairperson : 04-653 3406

Foreign Language Programme


Engineering Campus Programme


: 04-599 6385

Health Campus Programme


2. Registration of co-curricular courses through E-Daftar

is not allowed.

a. Registration for co-curricular courses is either done

through pre-registration before the semester begins or

during the first/second week of the semester. Co-

curricular courses will be included in the students’

course registration account prior to the e-daftar

activity, if their pre-registration application is

successful.

b. All approval/registration/dropping/adding of co-

curricular courses is under the responsibility and

administration of:

Director of the Centre for Co-Curricular Programme,

Main Campus (04-653 5242/5243/5248)

Coordinator of the Centre for Co-Curricular

Programme, Engineering Campus (04-599

5097/6385)

Coordinator of the Centre for Co-Curricular

Programme, Health Campus (09-767 7547)

7

3. Dropping of Language and Co-Curricular courses, if

necessary, must be made within the first week. After the

first week, a fine of RM50.00 will be imposed for each

course.

2.1.6 Registration of ‘Audit’ Courses (Y code)

Registration for the ‘Audit’ course (Y code) is not allowed on

the E-Daftar. It can be done during the official period of OCR

at the School or Centre involved.

Students who are interested must complete the course

registration form which can be printed from the Campusonline

Portal or obtained directly from the School. Approval from the

lecturers of the courses and the Dean/ Deputy Dean (Academic)

of the respective school is required.

Registration of ‘Audit’ courses (Y code) is not included in the

calculation of the total registered workload units. Grades

obtained from ‘Audit’ course are not considered in the

calculation of CGPA and total units for graduation.

2.1.7 Registration of Prerequisite Courses (Z code)

Registration of Prerequisite courses (Z code) is included in the

total registered workload (units). Grades obtained from the

Prerequisite courses are not considered in the calculation of

CGPA and units for graduation.

2.1.8 Late Course Registration and Late Course Addition

Late course registration and addition are not allowed after the

official period of the OCR ends unless with valid reasons.

General information on this matter is as follows:

1. Late course registration and addition are only allowed

in the first to the third week with the approval of the dean.

Students will be fined RM50.00 if the reasons given are not

acceptable.

2. Application to add a course after the third week will not

be considered, except for special cases approved by the

University.

8

2.1.9 Dropping of Courses

Dropping of courses is allowed until the end of the sixth week.

For this purpose, students must meet the requirements set by the

University as follows:

1. All Drop Forms must be completed by the student and

signed by the lecturer of the course involved and the

Dean/Deputy Dean of their respective Schools and

submitted to the general office of the School/Centre which

is responsible for offering the courses involved.

2. Students who wish to drop a language course must obtain

the signature and stamp of the Dean/Deputy Dean

(Academic) of the School of Languages, Literacies and

Translation.

3. Students who wish to drop the Co-Curricular courses must

obtain the approval of the Director/Co-ordinator of Co-

Curricular Programme.

4. The option for dropping courses cannot be misused.

Lecturers have the right not to approve the course that the

student wishes to drop if the student is not serious, such as

poor attendance record at lectures, tutorials and practical,

as well as poor performance in coursework. The student

will be barred from sitting for the examination and will be

given grade 'X' and is not allowed to repeat the course

during KSCP.

2.1.10 Course Registration Confirmation Slip

The course registration confirmation slip that has been

printed/obtained after registering the course should be checked

carefully to ensure there are no errors, especially the code type

of the registered courses.

Any data errors for course registration must be corrected

immediately whether during the period of E-Daftar (for

students with active status only) or during the registration

period at the Schools.

9

2.1.11 Revising and Updating Data/Information/Students’

Personal and Academic Records

Personal and academic information for each student can be

checked through the Campusonline portal.

Students are advised to always check all the information

displayed on this website.

1. The office of the Student Data and Records Unit must be

notified of any application/notification for

correction/updating of personal data such as the spelling of

names, identification card number and address (permanent

address and correspondence address).

2. The office of the Student Data and Records Unit must be

notified of any application/ notification for correction of

academic data such as information on major, minor, MUET

result and the course code.

2.1.12 Academic Advisor

Each School will appoint an Academic Advisor for each

student. Academic Advisors will advise their students under

their responsibility on academic matters.

2.2 Interpretation of Unit/Credit/Course

2.2.1 Unit

Each course is given a value, which is called a UNIT. The unit

is determined by the scope of its syllabus and the workload for

the students. In general, a unit is defined as follows:

Type of Course Definition of Unit

Theory 1 unit is equivalent to 1 contact hour per

week for 13 – 14 weeks in one semester

Practical/Laboratory/

Language Proficiency

1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours per

week for 13 – 14 hours in one semester

Industrial Training/

Teaching Practice

1 unit is equivalent to 2 weeks of training

Based on the requirements of Malaysian Qualifications

Framework (MQF):

One unit is equivalent to 40 hours of student learning time

[1 unit = 40 hours of Student Learning Time (SLT)]

10

2.2.2 Accumulated Credit Unit

Units registered and passed are known as credits. To graduate,

students must accumulate the total number of credits stipulated

for the programme concerned.

2.3 Examination System

Examinations are held at the end of every semester. Students have to sit

for the examination of the courses they have registered for except for

courses with 100% coursework. Students are required to settle all due fees

and fulfil the standing requirements for lectures/tutorials/practical and

other requirements before being allowed to sit for the examination of the

courses they have registered for. Course evaluation will be based on the

two components of coursework and final examinations. Coursework

evaluation includes tests, essays, projects, assignments and participation

in tutorials.

2.3.1 Duration of Examination

Evaluated Courses Examination Duration

2 units 1 hour for coursework of more

than 40%

2 units 2 hours for coursework of 40%

and below

3 units or more 2 hours for coursework of more

than 40%

3 units or more 3 hours for coursework of 40%

and below

2.3.2 Barring from Examination

Students will be barred from sitting for the final examination if

they do not fulfil at least 70% of the course requirements, such

as absence from lectures and tutorials, and have not

completed/fulfilled the required components of coursework. A

grade 'X' would be awarded for a course for which a student is

barred. Students will not be allowed to repeat the course during

the Courses During the Long Vacation (KSCP) period.

2.3.3 Grade Point Average System

Students’ academic achievement for registered courses will be

graded as follows:

Alphabetic

Grade A A- B+ B B- C+ C C- D+ D D- F

Grade Points 4.00 3.67 3.33 3.00 2.67 2.33 2.00 1.67 1.33 1.00 0.67 0

11

Students who obtained a grade 'C-' and below for a particular

course would be given a chance to improve their grades by

repeating the course during KSCP (see below) or the normal

semester. Students who obtained a grade 'C' and above for a

particular course are not allowed to repeat the course whether

during KSCP or normal semester.

The achievement of students in any semester is based on Grade

Point Average (GPA) achieved from all the registered courses

in a particular semester. GPA is the indicator to determine the

academic performance of students in any semester.

CGPA is the Cumulative Grade Point Average accumulated by

a student from one semester to another during the years of study.

The formula to compute GPA and CGPA is as follows:

n

∑ Ui Mi

Grade Point Average = i=1

__________

n

∑ Ui

i=1

where:

n = Number of courses taken

Ui = Course units for course i

Mi = Grade point for course i

Example of calculation for GPA and CGPA:

Course Unit Grade Point (GP) Grade (G ) Total GP

Semester I ABC XX1 4 3.00 B 12.00

ABC XX2 4 2.33 C+ 9.32

BCD XX3 3 1.67 C- 5.01

CDE XX4 4 2.00 C 8.00

EFG XX5 3 1.33 D+ 3.99

EFG XX6 2 2.67 B- 5.34

20 43.66

GPA = 43.66 = 2.18

20

12

Course Unit Grade Point (GP) Grade (G ) Total GP

Semester II ABC XX7 3 1.00 D 3.00

ABB XX8 4 2.33 C+ 9.32

BBC XX9 4 2.00 C 8.00

BCB X10 4 2.67 B- 10.68

XYZ XX1 3 3.33 B+ 9.99

18 40.99

GPA = 40.99 = 2.28

18

CGPA = Total Accumulated GP = 43.66 + 40.99 = 84.65 = 2.23

Total Accumulated Unit 20 + 18 38

From the above examples, the CGPA is calculated as the total

grade point accumulated for all the registered courses and

divided by the total number of the registered units.

2.3.4 Courses During the Long Vacation Period (Kursus Semasa

Cuti Panjang) (KSCP)

KSCP is offered to students who have taken a course earlier and

obtained a grade of 'C-', 'D+', 'D', 'D-', 'F' and 'DK' only. Students

who obtained a grade 'X' or 'F*' are not allowed to take the

course during KSCP.

The purpose of KSCP is to:

1. Give an opportunity to students who are facing time

constraints for graduation.

2. Assist students who need to accumulate a few more

credits for graduation.

3. Assist probationary students to enhance their academic

status.

4. Assist students who need to repeat a prerequisite course,

which is not offered in the following semester.

However, this opportunity is only given to students who are

taking courses that they have attempted before and achieved a

grade as stipulated above, provided that the course is being

offered. Priority is given to final year students. Usually, formal

lectures are not held, and teaching is via tutorials.

13

The duration of KSCP is 3 weeks, i.e. 2 weeks of tutorial and 1 week of

examination, all held during the long vacation. The KSCP schedule is

available on the University's Academic Calendar.

The Implementation of KSCP

1. Students are allowed to register for a maximum of 3 courses and

the total number of units registered must not exceed 10.

2. Marks/grades for coursework are taken from the highest

marks/the best grades obtained in a particular course in the

normal semester before KSCP. The final overall grade is

determined as follows:

Final Grade = The best coursework marks or grade +

Marks or grade for KSCP examination

3. GPA calculation involves the LATEST grades (obtained in

KSCP) and also involves courses taken in the second semester

and those repeated in KSCP. If the GPA during KSCP as

calculated above is 2.00 or better, the academic status will be

active, even though the academic status for the second semester

was probation status. However, if the GPA for KSCP (as

calculated above) is 1.99 or below, the academic status will

remain as probation status for the second semester.

4. Graduating students (those who have fulfilled the graduation

requirements) in the second semester are not allowed to register

for KSCP.

2.3.5 Academic Status

Active Status: Any student who achieves a GPA of 2.00 and

above for any examination in a semester will be recognised as

ACTIVE and be allowed to pursue his/her studies for the

following semester.

Probation Status: A probation status is given to any student who

achieves a GPA of 1.99 and below. A student who is under

probation status for three consecutive semesters (P1, P2, FO)

will not be allowed to pursue his/her studies at the university.

On the other hand, if the CGPA is 2.00 and above, the student

concerned will be allowed to pursue his/her studies and will

remain at P2 status.

14

2.3.6 Termination of Candidature

Without any prejudice to the above regulations, the University

Examination Council has the absolute right to terminate

any student's studies if he/she does not fulfil the

accumulated minimum credits.

The University Examination Council has the right to terminate

any student's studies due to certain reasons (a student who has

not registered for courses, has not attended any examination

without valid reasons), as well as medical reasons can be

disqualified from pursuing his/her studies.

2.3.7 Examination Results

Full results (with grade) will be announced by the University

through the Campus Online portal (campusonline.usm.my)

after the School Examination Council meeting which is

approximately one month after the final examination.

Students can print their official results document namely

‘SEMGRED’ through the Campus Online portal

(campusonline.usm.my) on the same day/date of the results

announcement.

2.4 Unit Exemption

2.4.1 Unit Exemption

Unit exemption is defined as the total number of units given to

students who are pursuing their studies in USM that are

exempted from the graduation requirements. Students only

need to accumulate the remaining units for graduation purposes.

Only passes or course grades accumulated or acquired in USM

will be included in the calculation of the Cumulative Grade

Point Average (CGPA) for graduation purposes.

2.4.2 Regulations and Implementation of Unit Exemption

1. Diploma holders from recognised Public and Private

Institutions of Higher Learning:

a. Unit exemption can only be given to courses taken

at diploma level. However, unit exemption is not

permitted for Mata Pelajaran Umum (MPU)

courses such as Language, Ethnic Relations and

TITAS courses taken at the diploma level.

b. Courses for unit exemption may be combined (in

two or more combinations) in order to obtain

15

exemption of one course at degree level. However

if the School would like to approve only one course

at the diploma level for unit exemption of one

course at degree level, the course at diploma level

must be equivalent to the degree course and have

the same number of or more units.

c. Courses taken during employment (in service) for

diploma holders cannot be considered for unit

exemption.

d. The minimum achievement at diploma level that

can be considered for unit exemption is a

minimum grade 'C' or 2.0 or equivalent.

e. The total number of semesters exempted should

not exceed two semesters.

f. In order to obtain unit exemption for industrial

training, a student must have continuous work

experience for at least two years in the area. If a

student has undergone industrial training during

the period of diploma studies, the student must

have work experience for at least one year. The

student is also required to produce a report on the

level and type of work performed. Industrial

training unit exemption cannot be considered for

semester exemption as the industrial training is

carried out during the long vacation in USM.

2. IPTS (Private Institution of Higher Learning) USM

Supervised/ External Diploma Graduates:

a. Students who are IPTS USM supervised/external

diploma graduates are given unit exemption as

stipulated by the specific programme of study.

Normally, unit exemption in this category is

given as a block according to the agreement between USM (through the School that offers the

programme) with the IPTS.

b. Students from recognised local or foreign IPTA (Public Institutions of Higher Learning)/IPTS who

are studying at the Bachelor’s Degree level may

apply to study in this university and if successful,

16

may be considered for unit exemption, subject to

the following conditions:

[1] Courses taken in the previous IPT are

equivalent (minimum 80% of the course must

be the same) to the courses offered in USM.

[2] Students taking courses at Advanced

Diploma level in IPT that are recognised to

be equivalent to the Bachelor’s Degree

course in USM may be considered for unit

exemption as in Section 2.5.

[3] The total maximum unit exemption allowed

should not exceed 30% of the total unit

requirement for graduation.

2.4.3 Total Number of Exempted Semesters

Semester exemption is based on the total units exempted as

below:

Total Units Exempted Total Semesters Exempted

8 and below None

9 – 32 1

33 to 1/3 of the

total units for graduation

2

2.4.4 Application Procedure for Unit Exemption

Any student who would like to apply for unit exemption is

required to complete the Unit Exemption Application Form

which can be obtained from the Examinations and Graduation

Unit or the respective Schools.

The form must be approved by the dean of the school prior to

submission to the Examinations and Graduation Unit for

consideration and approval.

2.5 Credit Transfer

Credit transfer is defined as the recognition of the total number of credits

obtained by USM students taking courses in other IPTAs (Public

Institution of Higher Learning) within the period of study at USM, and

is combined with credits obtained at USM to fulfil the unit requirements

17

for his/her programme of study. The transferred examination results or

grades obtained in courses taken at other IPTAs will be taken into

consideration in the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA)

calculation.

1. Category of Students Who Can Be Considered for Credit

Transfer

a. USM Bachelor’s Degree students who have obtained

approval to change to other new programmes in USM

(Change of Programme-PRP).

b. USM full-time Bachelor’s Degree students who would like

to attend a specific Bachelor’s Degree course at other

IPTAs.

c. USM full-time diploma students who would like to attend a

specific diploma course at other IPTAs.

2. Specific Conditions

a. Basic and Core Courses

Credit transfer can only be considered for credits obtained

from other courses in other IPTAs that are equivalent

(minimum 80% of the course must be the same) with the

courses offered by the programme.

Courses that can be transferred are only courses that have

the same number of units or more. For equivalent courses

but with less number of units, credit transfers can be

approved by combining a few courses. The credits

transferred are the same as the course units offered in USM.

Average grade of the combined courses will be taken into

account in the CGPA calculation.

b. Elective or Option Courses

Students may take any appropriate courses in other IPTAs

subject to permission from the School as well as the

approval of the IPTAs.

The transferred credits are credits obtained from courses at

other IPTAs. No course equivalence condition is required.

18

c. Minor Courses

For credit transfer of minor courses, the School should

adhere to either conditions (a) or (b), and take into account

the programme requirement.

3. General Conditions

a. There is no limit for PRP cases.

b. For students who have collected the credits via exchange or

mobility programme, the total maximum credits transferred

should not exceed one third of the total number of units for

the programme.

c. Credit transfer from other IPTAs can be considered only

once for each IPTA.

d. The examination results obtained by a student who has taken

courses at other IPTAs will be taken into account for

graduation purposes. Grades obtained for each course will

be combined with the grades obtained at USM for CGPA

calculation.

e. Students who have applied and obtained approval for credit

transfer are not allowed to cancel the approval after the

examination result is obtained.

f. Students are required to register for courses at other IPTAs

with not less than the total minimum units as well as not

exceeding the maximum units as stipulated in their

programme of study. However, for specific cases (e.g.

students on an extended semester and only require a few

units for graduation), the Dean may allow such students to

register less than the minimum units and the semester will

not be considered for the residential requirement. In this

case, the CGPA calculation will be similar to that

requirement of the KSCP.

g. USM students attending courses at other IPTAs who have

failed in any courses will be allowed to re-sit the

examinations of the courses if there is such a provision in

that IPTA.

h. If the method of calculation of examination marks in the

other IPTAs is not the same as in USM, grade conversions

will be carried out according to the existing scales.

i. USM students who have registered for courses at other

IPTAs but have decided to return to study in USM must

adhere to the existing course registration conditions of

USM.

19

2.5.1 Application Procedure for Attending Courses/Credit

Transfer

USM students who would like to apply to attend courses/credit

transfer at other IPTAs should apply using the Credit Transfer

Application Form.

The application form should be submitted for the Dean's

approval for the programme of study at least three months

before the application is submitted to other IPTAs for

consideration.

2.6 Academic Integrity

“Integrity without knowledge is weak and useless. Knowledge without

integrity is dangerous and dreadful.” - Samuel Johnson

Academic honesty is important because it is the main pillar in ensuring

that manners and ethics with regards to high academic integrity are

preserved.

Universiti Sains Malaysia encourages its students to respect and ensure

that any matter relating to academic integrity will be well-preserved.

Universiti Sains Malaysia always encourages its students to ensure that

manners, ethics and integrity would be essential in academics while

focusing on their studies in Universiti Sains Malaysia.

The following are practices or acts that are considered as conducts which

lack integrity in academics:

1. Cheating

Cheating in the context of academic include copying during

examination, usage of information or other aids in any

academic exercise without authorization or in dishonest

manner. There are numerous ways and methods of cheating

which include:

a. copying answers from others during test or exam;

b. any suspicious action that can be described as cheating or

an attempt to cheat in an exam;

c. using unauthorized materials or devices without

authorization (calculators, PDAs, mobile phones, pagers, or

any smart device, and other unauthorized devices) during

tests or exams;

20

d. asking or allowing another student to take test or exam on

behalf and vice-versa;

e. sharing answers or programmes in assignments or projects ;

f. purposely tampering the marks/grades given in any course

work, and then re-submitting it for remarking/regarding;

g. give command, to force, persuade, deceive or threaten

others to conduct research, write, program or do any task for

personal gain and

h. submitting any identical or similar work in more than one

course without consulting or prior permission from the

lecturers concerned.

2. Plagiarism

The reputation of an academic institution depends on the ability

to achieve and sustain academic excellence through the exercise

of academic integrity. Academic integrity is based on honesty,

trust, fairness, respect, and responsibility, which form the basis

of academic work.

One aspect of the loss of academic integrity is due to plagiarism,

which is the act of presenting published and unpublished ideas,

writings, works or inventions of others in written or other

medium, as one’s own original intellectual endeavours without

any clear acknowledgement of or reference to the author of the

source.

A substantial portion of academic work and research in the

university is in the written form and the university is committed

in deterring plagiarism.

POLICY ON PLAGIARISM OF UNIVERSITI SAINS MALAYSIA

University Sains Malaysia Policy on Plagiarism describes the

University’s strong commitment to uphold academic integrity in relation

to plagiarism. It will come into effect when there is an infringement of

academic conduct relating to plagiarism.

This policy acts as a guideline that both educates and prevents and can

be used as the basis if anyone that is part of the university violates any

rules and regulations of the University.

The policy applies to all students, former students, staff and former staff

which include fellows, post-doctorates, visiting scholars, as well as

academic, non-academic, research, contract and temporary staff who are

studying, serving or have served; or have graduated from the university.

21

Plagiarism is defined as the act of presenting, quoting, copying,

paraphrasing or passing off of ideas, images, processes, works, data, own

words or those of other people or sources without proper

acknowledgement, reference or quotation of the original source(s). The

acts of plagiarism include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. quoting verbatim (word-for-word replication of) works of other

people;

b. paraphrasing another person’s work by changing some of the words,

or the order of the words, without due acknowledgement of the

source(s);

c. submitting another person’s work in whole or part as one’s own;

d. auto-plagiarising or self-plagiarising (one’s own work or previous

work) that has already been submitted for assessment or for any

other academic award and pass it as a new creation without citing

the original content; and

e. insufficient or misleading referencing of the source(s) that would

enable the reader to check whether any particular work has indeed

been cited accurately and/or fairly and thus to identify the original

writer’s particular contribution in the work submitted.

The University will take action of every report and offences relating to

plagiarism and if the student is found guilty, the student can be charged

by the university according to the Students Disciplinary Rules.

3. Fabrication

Fabrication refers to a process of invention, adaptation or

copying with the intention of cheating. This is an act of

deceiving other people. Fabrication is somewhat related to

matters which have been ‘created’ or altered.

Invention or task outcome or academic work without

acknowledgement, alteration, falsification or misleading use of

data, information or citation in any academic work constitutes

fabrication. Fabricated information neither

represent the student's own effort nor the truth concerning a

particular investigation or study, and thus violating the principle

of truth in knowledge. Some examples are:

a. creating or exchanging data or results, or using someone

else’s results, in an experiment, assignment or research;

b. citing sources that are not actually used or referred to;

c. listing with intent, incorrect or fictitious references;

22

d. forging signatures of authorization in any academic record

or other university documents; and

e. developing a set of false data.

4. Collusion

Collusion refers to the cooperation in committing or to commit

or to do work with negative intentions. Some examples of

collusion include:

a. paying, bribing or allowing someone else to do an

assignment, test/exam, project or research for you;

b. doing or assisting others in an assignment, test/exam, project

or research for something in return;

c. permitting your work to be submitted as the work of others;

and

d. providing material, information or sources to others

knowing that such aids could be used in any dishonest act

5. Other violations relating to academic integrity

a. Attending lecture, tutorial, class or other form of teaching

relating to their courses late.

b. Sending or submitting any assignment relating to their

courses late.

c. Hiring someone else to do the assignment or thesis.

d. Carrying out businesses by providing services to write

assignments or theses of students.

e. Any other violations that USM deems as violating academic

integrity.

2.6.1 Consequences of Violating Academic Integrity

Students are responsible in protecting and upholding academic integrity

in USM.

If, in any specific event, should a student encounter any incident that

denotes academic dishonesty, the student needs to submit a report to the

relevant lecturer. The lecturer is then responsible to investigate and

substantiate the violation and report the matter to the Dean of the School.

1. If any violation of academic integrity is considered as not of a

serious nature, the Dean of the School may take administrative

action on the students.

2. However, if the violation is deemed serious by the school, this

matter shall be brought to the attention of the Secretariat of the

23

University Student Disciplinary Committee (Academic Cases)

at Legal Office, Level 2, Building E42, Chancellory II,

Universiti Sains Malaysia for further disciplinary action as

specified in the Rules.

3. If a student is caught copying or cheating during examination,

the Investigation Committee of Copying/Cheating in

Examination will pursue the matter according to the

University’s procedures. If the investigation found that there is

a case, the student(s) will be brought to the Student’s

Disciplinary Committee of the University. In this matter, the

rule on conduct during examination shall be applied.

4. Rule 48 of Universiti Sains Malaysia (Discipline of Students)

provides that a student who commits a disciplinary offence and

is found guilty of the offence shall be liable to any one or any

appropriate combination of two or more of the following

punishments as follows:

a. a warning ;

b. a fine not exceeding two hundred ringgit;

c. exclusion from any specific part or parts of the University

for a specified period;

d. suspension from being a student of the University for a

specified period; and

e. expulsion from the University.

Any student(s) who is found guilty and suspended from being a

student of the University for a specific period as decided by the

Student’s Disciplinary Committee (Academic Cases) or the

Student’s Disciplinary Committee (General Cases), such

suspension period shall not be counted in calculating the

candidature period of study of the student.

2.7 USM Mentor Programme

The Mentor Programme acts as a support-aid that involves staff

undergoing special training as consultants and guides to the USM

community who would like to share their feelings and any psychosocial

issues that could affect their social activities. This programme helps

individuals to manage psychosocial issues in a more effective manner,

which will eventually improve their well-being in order to achieve a

better quality of life.

24

Objectives

1. To serve as a co-operation and mutual assistance mechanism

for dealing with stress, psychosocial problems and many more

in order to ensure the well-being of the USM community.

2. To inculcate the spirit of unity and the concept of helping one

another by appointing a well-trained mentor as a social agent

who promotes a caring society for USM.

3. To produce more volunteers to assist those who need help.

4. To prevent damage in any psychosocial aspect before they

reach a critical stage.

2.8 Student Exchange Programme

2.8.1 Study Abroad Scheme

The student exchange programme is an opportunity for USM

students to study for one or two semesters abroad at any USM

partner institutions. Ideally, students are encouraged to

participate in the exchange programme within their third to fifth

semester (3 year degree programme) and within the third to

seventh semester (4 year degree programme).

USM students who wish to follow the SBLN programme must

discuss their academic plans with the Dean or Deputy Dean of

their respective Schools and also with the International

Mobility and Collaboration Centre (IMCC) (to ensure that

credits obtained from the external higher education institution

can be transferred as part of the credit accumulation for

graduation).

Any student who follows the SBLN programme and violates

any disciplinary act in the external higher education

institution, can be penalised in accordance with the

University (Discipline of Students) Rules if the matter is

referred to USM.

For further information, please visit www.imcc.usm.my or

contact the International Mobility and Collaboration Centre

(IMCC) at +604 – 653 2777/2774.

25

2.8.2 Student Exchange Programme in Local Higher Education

Institutions (RPPIPT)

This is a programme that allows students of Higher Learning

Institutions to do an exchange programme for a semester among

the higher institutions themselves. Students can choose any

relevant courses and apply for credit transfers.

USM students who want to participate in RPPIPT have to

discuss their academic plans with the Dean or Deputy Dean of

their respective Schools and the Division of Academic and

International (to ensure that credits obtained from the higher

education institution in Malaysia can be transferred as part of

the credit accumulation for graduation).

Any student who participates in RPPIPT and violates any of

the institution’s displinary rules can be penalised according to

the University (Discipline of Students) Rules if the matter is

referred to USM.

For further information, please contact the Academic &

International Division at +604 – 653 2430.

2.9 Ownership of Students’ Dissertation/Research Project/Theses and

University’s Intellectual Property

The copyright of a dissertation/research project/thesis belongs to the

student. However, as a condition for the conferment of a degree, the

student gives this right unconditionally, directly but not exclusively, and

free of royalties to the university to use the contents of the work/thesis

for teaching, research and promotion purposes. In addition, the student

gives non-exclusive rights to the University to keep, use, reproduce,

display and distribute copies of the original thesis with the rights to

publish for future research and the archives.

26

3.0 UNIVERSITY COURSE REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Summary of University Course Requirements

Students are required to take 15-22 credits for the following University

courses/options for University needs:

UNIVERSITY COURSE REQUIREMENTS CREDIT

1. General

Studies

(MPU)

U1 Local Students

HTU223 (Islamic and Asian Civilisations-

TITAS) (2 credits)

LKM400 (Bahasa Malaysia IV) (2 credits)

International Students

SEA205E(Malaysian Studies) (4 credits)

4

U2 WUS101 (Entrepreneurship Core) (2 credits) 2

U3 Local Students

SHE101(Ethnic Relations) (2 credits)


LKM100* (Bahasa Malaysia I) (2 credits)

2

U4 Co-curricular courses 2

2. Language

Skill

English Language Courses 4

3. Options Skill courses/Foreign Language Courses/ Other courses

offered by other schools

Students have to choose any of the following:

Co-curricular courses

Skill courses/Foreign Language Courses/ Other

courses offered by other schools

1-8

TOTAL 15-22

* International students pursuing Literary programs are required to

take two (2) more Bahasa Malaysia courses, namely LKM200 and

LKM300.

** Students from the School of Educational Studies are required to

choose a uniform body co-curricular package.

** Students from the School of Dental Sciences are required to take co-

curriculum courses that consists of three (3) credits. Further

information can be obtained from the Academic Office, School of

Dental Sciences.

27

3.2 General Studies Components (MPU)

General studies is one of the strategies and initiatives planned for the

purpose of Shift 1, which is Holistic, Entrepreneurial and Balanced

Graduates. Malaysia Education Blueprint 2015-2025 (Higher Education)

or PPPM (PT) outlines 10 shifts to achieve the aspirations of the nation's

higher education system and student aspirations.

General studies are divided into four groups as follows:

1. U1: appreciation of philosophy, values and history;

2. U2: the mastery of soft skills;

3. U3: expansion of the knowledge of Malaysia and its history;

and

4. U4: practical community management skills such as

community service and co-curriculum.

A. U1 Group

Local Students

All Malaysian students are required to take and pass the

following courses. In order to graduate, the minimum passing

grade required is Grade C.

(i) HTU223/2 (Islamic and Asian Civilisations -

TITAS)

The course synopsis is as follows:

This course aims to increase students' knowledge on

history, principles, values, main aspects of Malay

Civilization, Islamic Civilization and its culture. With

the academic exposure to cultural issues and

civilization in Malaysia, it is hoped that students will

be more aware of issues that can contribute to the

cultivation of the culture of respect and harmony

among the plural society in Malaysia. Among the

topics in this course are Interaction among Various

Civilizations, Islamic Civilization, Malay Civilization,

Contemporary Challenges faced by the Islamic and

Asian Civilization and the Islamic Hadhari Principles.

28

(ii) LKM400/2 (Bahasa Malaysia IV)

In order to graduate, the minimum passing grade

required is Grade C.

Entry requirements for Bahasa Malaysia are as

follows:

Note:

To obtain credits for Bahasa Malaysia courses, a minimum of

grade C is required. Students may seek advice from the School

of Language, Literacies and Translation if they have a different

Bahasa Malaysia qualification from the above.


All international students are required to take and pass the SEA205E/4

(Malaysian Studies) course. In order to graduate, the minimum passing

grade required is Grade C. The following is the synopsis of the course:

This course investigates the structure of the Malaysian system of

government and the major trends in contemporary Malaysia. Emphasis

will be given both to current issues in Malaysian politics and the

historical and economic developments and trends of the country. The

second part of the course focuses on specific issues: ethnic relations,

national unity and the national ideology; development and political

change; federal-state relations; the role of religion in Malaysian

politics; politics and business; Malaysia in the modern world system;

civil society; law, justice and order; and directions for the future.

B. U2 Group

All students are required to take and pass the WUS101/2 (Core

Entrepreneurship) course. In order to graduate, the minimum

passing grade required is Grade C. The following is the

synopsis of the course:

No Qualification Grade Entry Level Type Unit Status

1

(a) SPM/MCE/SC

(or equivalent qualification)

(b) STPM/HSC

(or equivalent qualification)

1 - 6

P/S

LKM400 U 2 Graduation

Requirement

29

This course provides basic exposure to students on

entrepreneurship and business fields, with emphasis on the

implementation of the learning aspects while experiencing the

process of executing business projects in campus. The main

learning outcome is the assimilation of culture and

entrepreneurship work ethics in their everyday life. This

initiative is made to open the minds and arouse the spirit of

entrepreneurship among target groups that possess the

potential to become successful entrepreneurs.

For more information, please refer to the Centre for Co-

Curricular Programme website.

C. U3 Group

Local students

All local students are required to take and pass the SHE101/2

(Ethnic Relations) course. In order to graduate, the minimum

passing grade required is Grade C. The following is the

synopsis of the course:

This course is an introduction to ethnic relations in Malaysia.

This course is designed with 3 main objectives: (1) to introduce

students to the basic concepts and the practices of social accord

in Malaysia, (2) to reinforce basic understanding of challenges

and problems in a multi-ethnic society, and (3) to provide an

understanding and awareness in managing the complexity of

ethnic relations in Malaysia. At the end of this course, it is

hoped that students will be able to identify and apply the skills

to issues associated with ethnic relations in Malaysia.

International students

All international students are required to take and pass the

LKM100/2 (Bahasa Malaysia I) course. In order to graduate,

the minimum passing grade required is Grade C.

(i) International students pursuing Bachelor’s Degree in

Arts are required to take the following courses:

Code Type Credit

LKM100 Z 2

LKM200 U 2

LKM300 U 2

30

(ii) International students pursuing Bachelor’s Degrees in

Science are required to take the following course:

Code Type Credit

LKM100 U 2

D. Group U4

All students are required to register for a co-curricular course in

order to complete the minimum requirement of two (2) credit

hours in the MPU structure.

Students who choose to take packaged co-curricular courses are

required to complete all levels of the package. Students can

choose the courses offered by the Core group as follows:

(i) Core of Volunteerism (6 - 10 credits)

All courses offered under this core are the uniformed

courses offered in the following packages:

PALAPES

Army

PALAPES

Navy

PALAPES

Air Force

SUKSIS

(Students’ Police

Volunteers)

WTD103/3 WTL103/3 WTU103/3 WPD101/2

WTD203/3 WTL203/3 WTU203/3 WPD201/2

WTD304/4 WTL304/4 WTU304/4 WPD301/2

SISPA

(Siswa Siswi

Pertahanan Awam

Malaysia)

Kelanasiswa

(Rovers)

St John

Ambulance

Red Crescent

Emergency Aid

Team

WPA103/2 WLK102/2 WJA102/2 WBM102/2

WPA203/2 WLK202/2 WJA202/2 WBM202/2

WPA303/2 WLK302/2 WJA302/2 WBM302/2



31

(ii) Core of Sports (1 - 3 credits)

The courses offered are as follows:

Packaged Courses (3 Credits, 3 Semesters)

(Students are required to complete all levels)

Karate Taekwondo

WSC108/1 WSC115/1

WSC208/1 WSC215/1

WSC308/1 WSC315/1

Non Packaged Courses (1 Credit)

WSC105/1 –Volley Ball WSC 125/1- Futsal

WSC106/1 - Golf WSC 126/1 - Netball

WSC110/1 - Archery WSC127/1 - Event Management 1

WSC111/1 - Table Tennis WSC227/1 - Event Management 2

WSC112/1 - Swimming WSC128/1 - Petanque

WSC113/1 - Aerobics WSC130/1 - Orienteering

WSC114/1 - Squash WSC131/1 - Woodball

WSC116/1 - Tennis WSC124/1 - Sepak Takraw

WSC119/1 - Badminton



(iii) Core of Culture (1 – 6 credits)


Packaged Courses (6 Credits, 3 Academic Sessions)


Jazz Band Seni Silat Cekak Malaysia

WCC108/2 WCC123/2

WCC208/2 WCC223/2

WCC308/2 WCC323/2


WCC105/1 - Gamelan WCC117/1 - Modern Theatre

WCC107/1 - Guitar WCC118/1 - Malay Shadow

Play

WCC109/1 - Choir WCC119/1 - Qigong Exercises

WCC115/1 - Modern Dance WCC124/1 - Musical Kompang

WCC116/1 - Traditional Dance WCC129/1 - Latin Dance



32

(iv) Core of Innovation and Initiative (1 - 2 credits)



WCC103/1 - Painting WCC128/1 - Embroidery and Beads

Sequin Art

WCC110/1 - Handcrafting WCC130/1 - Digital SLR Photography

Art

WCC120/1 - Canting Batik WCC 131/1 - Editing Digital Photography

Art

WCC121/1 - Calligraphic Art WCC132/1 - The Art of Ceramic

WCC122/1 - Cullinary Arts WCC133/1 - Decoupage Arts

WCC125/1 - Traditional of Kite Art

Non Packaged Courses (2 Credits)

WMU102/2 - Makers@USM Level 1



(v) Core of Community Service (4 credits)


Packaged Courses (4 Credits)


WKM102/2 - Community Service 1 WKM202/2 - Community Service 2


WSK102/2 - Volunteerism Science



(vi) Core of Public Speaking (2 credits)



WEC102/2 - Public Speaking in Malay Language

WEC103E/2 - Public Speaking in English Language



33

(vii) Core of Sustainability (2 credits)



WSU101/2 - Sustainability of Issues, Challenges and Prospects



3.3 Language Skills

All Bachelor’s degree students must take four (4) units from the English

Language courses to fulfil the University requirement for graduation.

(a) Entry Requirements for English Language Courses (for

students with MUET)

The following table shows the entry requirements for the

English language courses offered by the School of Languages,

Literacies and Translation.

Number MUET

qualification/

Pre-requisite course

Grade English Language

Course

Course Type

1 MUET or; Bands

2/3

LMT100

(2 units)

Pre-requisite/

Type Z

Discretion of the

Dean of PPBLT

2 MUET or; Band 4 LSP300

(2 units)

Compulsory/

Type U LMT100 or; A - C

Discretion of the

Dean of PPBLT

3 MUET or; Band 5 LSP

401/402/403/404

(2 units)

Compulsory/

Type U LSP300 or; A - C

Discretion of the

Dean of PPBLT

4 MUET or; Band 6 LHP

451/452/453/454/455/

456/457/458/459

* all LHP courses are 2

units except for

LHP457 which is 4

units

Compulsory/

Option/ Type

U LSP401/402/403/404

or;

A - C

Discretion of the

Dean of PPBLT

34

(b) Entry Requirements for English Language Courses (for

students with TOEFL or IELTS)

The following table shows the entry requirements for the

English language courses offered by the School of Languages,

Literacies and Translation.

TOEFL (Paper

Based Test)

TOEFL

(Computer

Based Test)

TOEFL

(Internet

Based Test)

IELTS English

Language Course

Course Type

310 - 413 0 - 103 0 - 34 1 – 4.5 LMT 100

(2 units)

Compulsory/

Type U

417 - 497 107 - 170 35 - 60 5.0 – 5.5 LSP 300

(2 units)

Compulsory/

Type U

500 - 650 173 - 277 61 - 114 6.0 – 8.0 LSP

401/402/403/404

(2 units)

Compulsory/

Type U

653 - 677 280 - 300 115 - 120 8.5 – 9.0 LHP Series

* all LHP courses

are 2 units except

for LHP457 which

is 4 units

Compulsory/

Option/

Type U

Note:

• Students are required to refer to the list of English language

courses required by their respective schools.

• Students may seek advice from the School of Languages,

Literacies and Translation if they have a different English

language qualification from the above.

• In order to obtain units in English Language courses, students

have to pass with a minimum grade ‘C’.

• Students with a Score of 260 – 300 (Band 6) in MUET must

accumulate the 4 units of English from the courses in the

advanced level (LHP451/452/453/454/455/456/457/458/459).

They can also take foreign language courses to replace their

English language units but they must first obtain written

consent from the Dean of the School of Languages, Literacies

and Translation. (Please use the form that can be obtained from

the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation).

• Students with a score less than 180 (Band 4) in MUET CAN re-

sit MUET to improve their score to Band 4 OR take LMT100

course and pass with a minimum grade C before they can

register for the LSP300 course.

35

(c) English Language Course

English courses offered as university courses are as follows:

No Code/Unit Course Title School (If Applicable)

1 LMT100/2 Preparatory English Students from all schools

2 LSP300/2 Academic English Students from all schools

3 LSP401/2 General English

School of Language, Literacies and

Translation

School of Educational Studies (Literature)

School of the Arts

School of Humanities

School of Social Sciences

4 LSP402/2 Scientific and Medical

English

School of Biological Sciences

School of Physics

School of Chemical Science

School of Mathematical Sciences

School of Industrial Technology

School of Educational Studies (Science)

School of Medical Sciences

School of Health Science and Dentistry

School of Pharmaceutical Sciences

5 LSP403/2

Business and

Communication

English

School of Management

School of Communication

6 LSP404/2 Technical and

Engineering English

School of Computer Sciences

School of Housing, Building and Planning

School of Engineering

3.4 Options (1 – 8 credits)

A. Co-curricular course

Students who have enrolled co-curricular courses in excess of

two (2) credits under the U4 General Subjects requirement are

not required to attend the co-curriculum course under the

Option courses. Students only need to register for skill courses

or Foreign Language courses subject to the graduation

requirements of their respective program of study.

The details of the list of co-curricular courses offered are in

the U4 General Subjects section as stated above.

36

B. Skill / Foreign Language Courses / Courses offered by other

schools

Students can choose the following courses as an option:

(i) WSU 101/2 (Sustainability: Issues, Challenges &

Prospects)

The following is the synopsis of the course:

This course introduces and exposes the concept of

sustainable development to students. The course aims to

ensure future generation capabilities to meet their needs

in the future are not affected, especially in the era of

challenging globalization and the rapid development of

information technology at present. Sustainable

development models and case studies are also discussed.



(ii) HTV201/2 - Thinking Techniques

The following is the synopsis of the course:

This course introduces students to various creative

thinking such as styles and thinking tools that can

broaden understanding of creativity and improve problem

solving skills. Students are trained to select and apply the

best techniques to solve specific problems. So this course

helps students to learn to think effectively in order to make

the most effective decisions in both their studies and daily

life.

(iii) Other options / skill courses as recommended or required

by the respective schools (if any)

37

(iv) English language course

The following courses may be taken as a university course

to fulfil the compulsory English language requirements

(for students with Band 6 in MUET) or as a skill / option

course:

No Code/Unit Course Title

1. LHP451/2 Effective Reading

2. LHP452/2 Business Writing

3. LHP453/2 Creative Writing

4. LHP454/2 Academic Writing

5. LHP455/2 English Pronunciation Skills

6. LHP456/2 Spoken English

7. LHP457/4 Public Speaking and Speech

Writing

8. LHP458/2 English for Translation

(Offered during Semester II

only)

9. LHP459/2 English for Interpretation

(Offered during Semester I

only)

(v) Foreign Language Courses

The foreign language courses offered by the School of

Languages, Literacies and Translation can be taken by

students as option or compulsory courses to fulfil the

number of units required for graduation. Students are not

allowed to register for more than one foreign language

course per semester. They must complete at least two

levels of a foreign language course before they are

allowed to register for another foreign language course.

However, students are not required to complete all four

levels of one particular foreign language course. The

foreign language courses offered are as follows:

Arab Chinese Japanese German Spanish

LAA100/2 LAC100/2 LAJ100/2 LAG100/2 LAE100/2




French Thai Tamil Korean

LAP100/2 LAS100/2 LAT100/2 LAK100/2

LAP200/2 LAS200/2 LAT200/2 LAK200/2

LAP300/2 LAS300/2 LAT300/2 LAK300/2

LAP400/2 LAS400/2

38

4.0 COURSES AND PROGRAMMES OFFERED IN SCHOOL OF

HEALTH SCIENCES

4.1 Foundation Courses

Foundation courses cover the basic knowledge and skills essential for various health related

disciplines and are intended to prepare the students to undertake more advance courses

later on. The total number of units required for graduation varies according to the respective

programmes.

Code/Unit Course

1. GTU101/3 Structure and Function of Human I

2. GTU103/3 Fundamental of Health Informatics

3. GTU104/3 Structure and Function of Human II

4. GTU105/3 Psychology and Behavioural Science

5. GTU106/3 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics

6. GTU202/3 Health and Society

7. GTU301/3 Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals

8. GTU302/3 Biostatistics

9. GTU304/3 Research Methodology

4.2 Core Courses

The core courses are the major component of the programme of studies and reflect the

specialisation and expertise of each programme.

4.3 Electives Courses

Elective courses provide students with knowledge which not only complement the core

courses but will also enhance and broaden their foundation of knowledge. Majority of

elective courses are coded as GEG but there are also courses from various programmes

offered as elective. Students are advised to discuss with his/her academic advisors prior to

course registration.

4.4 Unit Requirements for Graduation

Programme Core

Courses

Elective

Courses

University

Courses Total

Bachelor of Health Science

Audiology 119 9 15 143

Biomedicine 114 7 15 136

Dietetics 114 7 15 136

Environmental &

Occupational Health

115 5 15 135

Exercise & Sports Science 70 32 18 120

Medical Radiation 111 10 15 136

Nutrition 106 15 15 136

Speech Pathology 121 7 15 143

Bachelor of Science

Forensic Science 124 6 15 145

39

4.5 Graduation Requirements

a) Satisfy all credit requirements for the Academic Programme i.e total credits

and the required number of credits for each component in the programme

[Core, Elective, University and Optional (if appropriate) courses].

b) Obtain a minimum grade points of 2.00 (Grade C) and above for all Core

courses.

c) Obtain a final CGPA of 2.00 and above for the whole programme.

d) Obtain a minimum grade C or grade point 2.00 for the language courses

(Bahasa Malaysia and English), Ethnic Relations and TITAS courses.

40

5.0 PROGRAMMES

5.1 Bachelor of Health Science (Audiology)

Programme Aims

The Audiology programme is designed to produce audiologists who are knowledgeable

and competent in the field of audiology to fulfil the needs of public and private sectors.

Programme Learning Outcomes

Upon completion of the programme, graduates should be able to:

PO 1: Apply basic and advance knowledge in audiological science.

PO 2: Integrate theoretical knowledge in clinical practice, conduct appropriate

audiological evaluation dan management using evidence based practice, as well

as involve in hearing screening and rehabilitation programme.

PO 3: Demonstrate complex problem solving, decision making, clinical reasoning and

reflection skills.

PO 4: Demonstrate effective communication skills in delivering information.

PO 5: Collaborate with other healthcare professionals.

PO 6: Identify the legislative foundation in healthcare, adhere to ethical standards and

respect the difference in culture and religions.

PO 7: Utilise ICT and lifelong learning skills for professional development in

audiological science.

PO 8: Demonstrate entrepreneurial skills in career development.

PO 9: Demonstrate leadership skills in workplace and community.

Curriculum Components

Core Courses Elective Courses University Courses Total Credit Units

119 9 15 143

41

List of Core Courses

No. Course

Code Course

Credit

Hour

1 GTU101 Structure and Function of Human I 3

2 GTU104 Structure and Function of Human II 3

3 GTA106 Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech I 2

4 GTA107 Psychoacoustics 2

5 GTA109 Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech II 2

6 GTA110 Basic Audiology Techniques 3

7 GTP100 Basic Linguistics 3

8 GTP104 Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing 3

9 GTP109 Language Development 3

10 GTP110 Clinical Bases for Audiology and Speech Pathology 2

11 GTA203 Advanced Audiology Techniques 3

12 GTA205 Neurology for Hearing and Speech 2

13 GTA208 Pediatric Audiology 4

14 GTA209 Audiology Clinic I 3

15 GTA210 Otology 3

16 GTA211 Hearing Screening 2

17 GTA212 Basic Hearing Amplification Technology 3

18 GTA213 Electrophysiological Tests 3

19 GTP211 Pediatric for Hearing and Speech 3

20 GTP212 Abnormal Psychology 2

21 GTP217 Introduction to Communication Disorders 3

22 GTP218 Acoustic and Phonetics 3

23 GTU302 Biostatistics 3

24 GTU304 Research Methodology 3

25 GTA305 Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology 3

26 GTA307 Audiology Clinic II 3

27 GTA308 Evaluation of Balance System 2

28 GTA309 Audiology Clinic III 4

29 GTA310 Basic Medical Management for Audiologist and

Speech Pathologist

2

30 GTA311 Audiological Rehabilitation 4

31 GTP311 Counselling for Communication Disorders 3

32 GTP316 Learning Disabilities 3

33 GTA401 Research Project 6

34 GTA406 Noise and Hearing 2

35 GTA407 Audiology Clinic IV 5

36 GTA408 Audiology Clinical Placement 6

37 GTA410 Ethics and Professionalism in Audiology 2

38 GTA411 Audiology Clinic V 5

39 GTA413 Practice Management and Seminar in Audiology 3

Total Credit Hours for Core Courses 119

42

Suggested Scheme of Study

Component

Semester 1 Semester 2

Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

LKM400 Malay Language

IV

2 WUS101 Core

Entrepreneurship

2

LSP300 Academic English 2 WCC130 The Arts Of SLR

Digital Photography

1

WCC120 Batik Canting 1

Core

Courses

GTU101 Structure and

Function of Human I

3 GTU104 Structure and

Function of Human II

3

GTA106 Anatomy and

Physiology for Hearing and

Speech I

2 GTP 104 Developmental

Psychology for Speech and

Hearing

3

GTP100 Basic Linguistics

3 GTP110 Clinical Bases for

Audiology and Speech

Pathology

2

GTP109 Language

Development

3 GTA109 Anatomy and


Speech II

2

GTA107 Psychoacoustics 2

GTA110 Basic Audiology

Techniques 3

Elective

Courses

GTU105 Psychology and

Behavioural Science 3

GTU103 Fundamental of

Health Informatics 3

Total 19 21

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

HTU223 Islamic and Asian

Civilisation

2 LSP402 Scientific and

Medical English

2

SHE101 Ethnic Relations 2 WSC125 Futsal 1

Core

Courses

GTP217 Introduction to

Communication Disorders 3 GTA208 Pediatric Audiology 4

GTP218 Acoustic and

Phonetics 3 GTA209 Audiology Clinic I 3

GTP211 Pediatric for

Hearing and Speech 3 GTA210 Otology 3

GTP212 Abnormal

Psychology 2 GTA211 Hearing Screening 2

GTA203 Advanced

Audiology Techniques 3

GTA212 Basic Hearing

Amplification Technology 3

GTA205 Neurology for

Hearing and Speech 2

GTA213 Electrophysiological

Tests 3

Elective

Courses

Total 20 21

43

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses

GTP311 Counselling for

Communication Disorders


GTU304 Research

Methodology

3 GTP316 Learning

Disabilities 3

GTA305 Advanced Hearing

Amplification Technology

3 GTA309 Audiology Clinic

III 4

GTA307 Audiology Clinic

II

3 GTA310 Basic Medical

Management for Audiologist

and Speech Pathologist

2

GTA308 Evaluation of

Balance System

2 GTA311 Audiological

Rehabilitation 4

Elective

Courses

GTU301 Ethics and Law for

Healthcare Professionals 3

Total 17 16

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses

GTA401 Research Project (3/6) GTA401 Research Project (3/6)

GTA406 Noise and

Hearing 2

GTA410 Ethics and

Professionalism in

Audiology

2

GTA407 Audiology Clinic

IV 5 GTA411 Audiology Clinic V 5

GTA408 Audiology

Clinical Placement 6

GTA413 Practice

Management and Seminar in

Audiology

3

Elective

Courses

Total 16 13

44

5.2 Bachelor of Health Science (Biomedicine)

Programme Aims

The Biomedicine programme is designed to enable students to explore the aspects of

laboratory diagnosis, disease prevention and research in Biomedical Sciences.



PO1: Apply theoretical, conceptual and practical knowledge in biomedical sciences.

PO2: Perform medical laboratory procedure or research, validate findings and conduct

research under supervision in biomedical and research laboratories.

PO3: Utilise scientific thinking as well as critical and creative thinking in identifying

and solving problems in biomedical and research laboratories, and subsequently

apply the research knowledge towards effective services.

PO4: Present information and findings clearly, and communicate effectively with

stakeholders.

PO5: Demonstrate social and teamwork skills, as well as responsible and sensitive

towards community and health issues.

PO6: Adhere to safety requirements and regulations, legislative and ethical principles,

as well as code of conduct in biomedical and research laboratories.

PO7: Apply skills and principles of life long learning in academic and career

development, as well as utilise ICT and information management system to

enhance practice in biomedical and research laboratories.

PO8: Practice quality management system and Good Laboratory Practice (GLP), as

well as demonstrate entrepreneurial skills in biomedical and research laboratories.

PO9: Demonstrate leadership quality and social skills in biomedical or research

laboratories, and able to work together with healthcare professional team.



114 7 15 136

45


No. Course

Code Course

Credit

Hour


2 GTU103 Fundamental of Health Informatics 3


4 GTU105 Psychology and Behavioral Science 3

5 GTU106 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics 3

6 GTB105 Human Biochemistry 3

7 GTB106 Laboratory Science 3

8 GTB110 Basic Microbiology 3

9 GTB204 Molecular Biology Techniques 3

10 GTB218 Immunology II 3

11 GTB219 Pharmacology I 3

12 GTB221 Basic Hematology 3

13 GTB222 Pathology 4

14 GTB224 Immunology I 3

15 GTB225 Epidemiology 3

16 GTB226 Cell Biology Techniques 3

17 GTU301 Ethics and Law for Healthcare Professionals 3



20 GTB316 Transfusion Science and Blood Banking 3

21 GTB317 Laboratory and Clinical Hematology 3

22 GTB318 Pharmacology II 3

23 GTB319 Toxicology 3

24 GTB320 Medical Virology and Mycology 3

5 GTB322 Medical Bacteriology 3

26 GTB323 Medical Parasitology 4

27 GTB324 Clinical Biochemistry 4

28 GTB325 Clinical Diagnostic Laboratory Management 4

29 GTB408 Biomedical Practicum 9

30 GTB411 Research Project 8

31 GTB413 Industrial Training 9

NOTE:

For 3U1I Programme, three courses (GTB408, GTB411 and GTB413) will be

replaced with GTB414 and GTB415 with total credit hours of 26.

29 GTB414 Industrial Attachment 18

30 GTB415 Industrial Research Project 8


46


Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


IV 2

WUS101 Core

Entrepreneurship 2

WCC120 Batik Canting 1 LSP300 Academic English 2

WCC130 The Arts of SLR

Digital Photography 1

Core

Courses


Function of Human I 3


Function of Human II 3



GTB105 Human

Biochemistry 3



GTB110 Basic

Microbiology 3

GTU106 Biochemistry

and Basic Genetics 3

GTB106 Laboratory

Science 3

Elective

Courses

GEG208 Human Resource

Management in Health

Organisations

2

GEG304 Communication

and Self Development 2

Total 18 18

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


Civilisation 2 WSC125 Futsal 1

SHE101 Ethnic Relations 2

LSP402 Scientific and

Medical English 2

Core

Courses

GTB204 Molecular Biology

Techniques 3 GTB218 Immunology II 3

GTB224 Immunology I 3 GTB219 Pharmacology I 3

GTB221 Basic Hematology 3 GTB222 Pathology 4

GTB225 Epidemiology 3

GTB226 Cell Biology

Techniques 3

Elective

Courses GTU202 Health and Society 3

Total 18 17

47

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses

GTB317 Laboratory and

Clinical Hematology 3

GTB316 Transfusion Science

and Blood Banking 3

GTB318 Pharmacology II 3 GTB319 Toxicology 3

GTB322 Medical

Bacteriology 3

GTB320 Medical Virology

and Mycology 3

GTB323 Medical

Parasitology 4

GTB324 Clinical

Biochemistry 4

GTU301 Ethics and Law

for Healthcare Professionals 3

GTB325 Clinical Diagnostic

Laboratory Management 4

GTU304 Research

Methodology 3 GTU302 Biostatistics 3

Elective

Courses

Total 19 20

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses

GTB408 Biomedical

Practicum 9 GTB413 Industrial Training 9

GTB411 Research Project (4/8) GTB411 Research Project (4/8)

Elective

Courses

Total 13 13

For 3U1I programme

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses

GTB414 Industrial

Attachment (9/18)

GTB414 Industrial

Attachment (9/18)

GTB415 Industrial

Research Project (4/8)

GTB415 Industrial Research

Project (4/8)

Elective

Courses

Total 13 13

48

5.3 Bachelor of Health Science (Dietetics)

Programme Aims

The Dietetics programme provides theoretical and clinical training experiences which

cover all aspects of dietary intervention, knowledge of community nutritional

requirements, disease prevention and health promotion.



PO1: Apply comprehensive theoretical knowledge in dietetics to solve issues and

overcome the challenges in dietetics practices.

PO2: Apply the knowledge in dietetics to analyse, formulate and make decision in

enhancing the nutritional status for patients in hospitals and community in

general.

PO3: Demonstrate critical thinking and scientific knowledge in dietetics.

PO4: Demonstrate effective communication skills to patient and in healthcare team.

PO5: Demonstrate the ability to work in a team of healthcare professionals.

PO6: Demonstrate the characteristics of ethical, professionalism and values in the

career as dietitians.

PO7: Adhere to professional development and lifelong learning.

PO8: Apply entrepreneurship and management skills using the knowledge of nutrition

and dietetics in career development.

PO9: Demonstrate the ability as leaders in professional healthcare team.



114 7 15 136

49


No. Course

Code Course

Credit

Hour




4 GTU105 Psychology and Behavioural Science 3

5 GTN103 Food Science 3

6 GTN104 Principles of Nutrition 3

7 GTN105 Principles of Food Preparation 3

8 GTN106 Food Analysis 3

9 GTN208 Nutritional Biochemistry 3

10 GTN215 Nutrition for Health and Fitness 3

11 GTN217 Assessment of Nutritional Status 4

12 GTN218 Nutrition in the Life Cycle 3

13 GTN220 Nutrition Education and Promotion 3

14 GTN221 Nutrition and Disease 3

15 GTD213 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I 3

16 GTD214 Dietetics Counselling and Communication 2




20 GTN305 Advanced Nutrition 3

21 GTN311 Food Service Management 3

22 GTN319 Food Microbiology 3

23 GTN320 Nutrition and Dietetic Community Practicum 4

24 GTD321 Therapeutic Diet Preparation 3

25 GTD323 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II 3

26 GTD327 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy III 2

27 GTD328 Dietetics Skill 3

28 GTD329 Research Project in Dietetics I 2

29 GTN402 Nutrition and Genetics 2

30 GTD409 Research Project in Dietetics II 4

31 GTD411 Clinical Dietetics Practicum I 9

32 GTD412 Clinical Dietetics Practicum II 12

33 GTD413 Food Service and Industry Practicum 4


50


Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


IV 2 LSP300 Academic English 2


Digital Photography 1 WSC125 Futsal 1

Core

Courses









GTN103 Food Science 3 GTN105 Principles of Food

Preparation 3

GTN104 Principles of

Nutrition 3 GTN106 Food Analysis 3

Elective

Courses


Management in Healthcare

Organisations

2

Total 15 17

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


Civilisation 2

WUS101 Core

Entrepreneurship 2



Medical English 2

Core

Courses

GTN208 Nutritional

Biochemistry

3 GTN217 Assessment of

Nutritional Status

4

GTN218 Nutrition in the

Life Cycle

3 GTD213 Principles of

Medical Nutrition Therapy I

3

GTN215 Nutrition for

Health and Fitness

3 GTD214 Dietetics

Counselling and

Communication

2

GTN220 Nutrition Education

and Promotion

3

GTN221 Nutrition and

Disease

3

Elective

Courses

GTN219 Food

Anthropology

2

GTU202 Health and Society 3

Total 20 17

51

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses WCC120 Batik Canting 1

Core

Courses

GTD321 Therapeutic Diet

Preparation 3

GTD327 Principles of

Medical Nutrition Therapy

III

2



II

3 GTD328 Dietetics Skill 3


Dietetic Community

Practicum

4 GTD329 Research Project in

Dietetics I 2

GTN319 Food

Microbiology 3

GTN311 Food Service

Management

3

GTU302 Biostatistics 3 GTU304 Research

Methodology 3

GTN305 Advanced

Nutrition 3


Healthcare Professionals

3

Elective

Courses

Total 20 16

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses

GTD409 Research Project

in Dietetics II 4

GTD412 Clinical Dietetics

Practicum II

12

GTD413 Food Service and

Industry Practicum 4

GTD411 Clinical Dietetics

Practicum I 9


Genetics 2

Elective

Courses

Total 19 12

52

5.4 Bachelor of Health Science (Environmental and Occupational Health)

Programme Aims

The Environmental and Occupational Health programme is designed to equip the students

with theoretical knowledge, practical skills and industrial training experience in

environmental and occupational health.

Programme Learning Outcome


PO1: Apply foundation knowledge and demonstrate the ability to utilise the theoretical

and practical knowledge in various situations involving environmental and

occupational safety and health.

PO2: Perform technical skills and able to produce perception in identifying problems in

environmental and occupational health.

PO3: Apply critical and creative thinking in obtaining information on environmental

and occupational health, and subsequently utilise the knowledge in research

towards effective services.

PO4: Apply communication skills effectively in working environment including

organisation, industry and community.

PO5: Utilise social skills and participate as group member to realise the aim of the

organisation and demonstrate the ability to solve environmental and occupational

health related problems in a team.

PO6: Demonstrate values, attitude, ethical and professionalism in environmental and

occupational safety and services.

PO7: Demonstrate lifelong learning and ICT skills, and identify the related sources to

enhance the services and research in environmental and occupational health.

PO8: Utilise the sources and entrepreneurial skills in environmental and occupational

health profession to fulfil the needs of community groups.

PO9: Demonstrate leadership skills in activities related to environment, occupation,

healthcare and research.

Course Components


115 5 15 135

53


No. Course

Code Course

Credit

Hour





5 GTK101 Introduction to Environmental and Occupational

Health

3

6 GTK105 Occupational Safety 3

7 GTK106 Occupational Health 3

8 GTB106 Laboratory Science 3

9 GTF101 Basic Chemistry 3

10 GTK205 Supply and Quality of Drinking Water 3

11 GTK206 Industrial Hygiene 3

12 GTK207 Food Hygiene and Safety 3

13 GTK208 Solid Waste Management 3

14 GTK209 Engineering Control Design 3

15 GTK210 Occupational Diseases 3

16 GTK211 Occupational Safety and Health Laws 3




20 GTK312 Ergonomic 3

21 GTK313 Pest and Vector Control 3

22 GTK314 Communicable Disease Control 3

23 GTK315 Occupational Safety and Health Management 3

24 GTK316 Environmental Management 3

25 GTK317 Emergency Response and Planning 3

26 GTK318 Environmental Health Legislation 2

27 GTK319 Pollution Control Technology 3

28 GTK320 Environmental and Occupational Toxicology 3

29 GTK321 Research Project 6

30 GTK409 Environmental and Occupational Health Practicum 26


54


Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


IV 2

WUS101 Core

Entrepreneurship 2




Core

Courses





GTB106 Laboratory

Science 3



GTU106 Biochemistry and

Basic Genetics 3

GTK105 Occupational Safety 3

GTF101 Basic Chemistry 3 GTK106 Occupational

Health

3

GTK101 Introduction to

Environmental and

Occupational Health

3

Elective

Courses



GTJ108 Health

Communication and

Education

2

Total 21 19

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


Civilisation 2


Medical English 2


WSC125 Futsal 1

Core

Courses

GTK209 Engineering

Control Design 3 GTU302 Biostatistics 3

GTK205 Supply and

Quality of Drinking Water


GTK207 Food Hygiene and

Safety

3 GTU304 Research

Methodology 3

GTK211 Occupational

Safety and Health Laws

3 GTK206 Industrial Hygiene 3

GTK208 Solid Waste

Management

3

GTK210 Occupational

Diseases

3

Elective

Courses

Total 17 20

55

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses

GTK 312 Ergonomic 3 GTK314 Communicable

Disease Control

3

GTK 313 Pest and Vector

Control

3

GTK315 Occupational

Safety and Health

Management

3

GTK 317 Emergency

Response and Planning

3 GTK316 Environmental

Management

3

GTK318 Environmental

Health Legislation

2 GTK319 Pollution Control

Technology

3


and Occupational

Toxicology

3 GTK321 Research Project (3/6)

GTK321 Research Project (3/6)

Elective

Courses

Total 17 15

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses


and Occupational Health

Practicum

(13/26)

GTK409 Environmental and

Occupational Health

Practicum

(13/26)

Elective

Courses

Total 13 13

56

5.5 Bachelor of Health Science (Exercise and Sports Science)

Programme Aims

The Exercise and Sports Science programme provides theoretical and practical training

experience to enable graduates to function as the experts in the field required by the public

and private sectors.



PO1: Apply theoretical knowledge in exercise and sports sciences.

PO2: Perform practical, procedure and research related to exercise and sports science.

PO3: Utilise critical and creative thinking skills as well as scientific thinking to identify

and solve problems.

PO4: Communicate effectively in verbal and written forms to deliver information,

findings and results within exercise and sports science context with clients, peers

and stakeholders.

PO5: Demonstrate the skills and social responsibilities, teamwork and sensitive in

coordinating daily activities of exercise and sports science practice with various

professions and community involving different religions, culture and

environments.

PO6: Demonstrate high level of moral and values as well as ethical and professionalism

in adhering to ethical principles, code of conduct, law and regulations in exercise

and sports science practices.

PO7: Utilise skills in information and communication technology, information

management system and lifelong learning in academic and career development.

PO8: Apply managerial and entrepreneurial skills in everyday activities and planning

by considering the actual scenarios and from different perspectives.

PO9: Utilise knowledge and understanding in leadership for effective leadership in the

effort to contribute to the advancement of exercise and sports science.



70 32 18 120

57


No. Course

Code Course

Credit

Hour



3 GTS101 Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science 2

4 GTS102 Sociology and Philosophy of Sports 3

5 GTS103 Exercise Physiology and Anatomy of Movement 4

6 GTS104 Exercise Physiology 3

7 GTS105 Sports Psychology 3


9 GTU202 Health and Society 3

10 GTS206 Sports Training Methodology 3

11 GTS208 Kinanthropometry, Tests and Measurements for Sports

Science 3

12 GTS209 Sports Nutrition 3

13 GTS210 Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology 3

14 GTS211 Motor Learning 3




18 GTS317 Sports Management 3

19 GTS322 Research Project 10

20 GTS411 Industrial Training 6


58


Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

University Courses

LKM400 Malay

Language IV 2

WUS101 Core

Entrepreneurship 2

WSC125 Futsal 1 LSP300 Academic

English 2

WCC120 Batik

Canting 1

Core Courses

GTU103 Fundamental

of Health Informatics

3 GTS104 Exercise

Physiology

3

GTU105 Psychology

and Behavioural

Science

3 GTS105 Sports

Psychology

3

GTS101 Introduction

to Exercise and Sports

Science

2 GTU202 Health and

Society

3

GTS102 Sociology

and Philosophy of

Sports

3

GTS103 Exercise

Physiology and

Anatomy of

Movement

4

Elective

Courses

Package 1 (Exercise

and Sport

Physiology)

GTS202 First Aid and

Cardiopulmonary

Resuscitation

2 GTB225

Epidemiology 3

OR OR

Package 2 (Coaching

Science)


Cardiopulmonary

Resuscitation

2 GTB225

Epidemiology 3

OR OR

Package 3 (Exercise

and Sport

Psychology)


Cardiopulmonary

Resuscitation

2 GTB225

Epidemiology 3

Total 20 17

59

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

University Courses

WCC130 The Arts of

SLR Digital

Photography

1 WSC110 Archery 1

SHE101 Ethnic

Relations

2 LAA100 Arabic

Language I

2


Medical English 2

HTU223 Islamic and

Asian Civilisation

2

Core Courses

GTS206 Sports

Training Methodology

3 GTU301 Ethics and

Law for Healthcare

Professionals

3

GTS208

Kinanthropometry,

Tests and

Measurements for

Sports Science

3 GTS209 Sports

Nutrition

3


Nutrition

3 GTS210 Sports

Biomechanics and

Kinesiology

3

GTS211 Motor

Learning

3

Elective

Courses

Package 1 (Exercise

and Sport

Physiology)

GTU106

Biochemistry and

Basic Genetics

3 GTS212 Applied

Sports Physiology 3

OR OR

Package 2 (Coaching

Science)

GTS207 Principle of

Training in Individual

and Team Sport

3 GTS212 Applied

Sports Physiology 3

OR OR

Package 3 (Exercise

and Sport

Psychology)

GTS207 Principle of

Training in Individual

and Team Sport

3

GTS213 Physical

Activity, Growth and

Development

3

Total 19 18

60

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

University Courses

Core Courses

GTU302 Biostatistics 3 GTS317 Sports

Management

3

GTU304 Research

Methodology

3 GTS322 Research

Project

(5/10)

GTS322 Research

Project

(5/10)

Elective

Courses

Package 1 (Exercise

and Sport

Physiology)

GTS312 Sports

Injuries and

Rehabilitation

3 GTS320 Sports

Psychophysiology 3

GTS316 Adapted

Physical Activity

3 GTS323 Fitness

Testing and Exercise

Prescription

3

GTB224 Immunology

I 3

GTS324 Therapeutic

Exercise 3

OR OR

Package 2 (Coaching

Science)

GTS316 Adapted

Physical Activity

3 GTS213 Physical

Activity, Growth and

Development

3

GTS321 Coaching

Psychology

3 GTS323 Fitness

Testing and Exercise

Prescription

3

GTS315 Coaching

Science and Sports

Performance Analysis

3 GEG213 Stress

Management

3

OR OR

Package 3 (Exercise

and Sport

Psychology)

GTS316 Adapted

Physical Activity

3 GTS319 Applied

Sports Psychology 3

GTS315 Coaching

Science and Sports

Performance Analysis

3 GTS320 Sports

Psychophysiology 3

GTS321 Coaching

Psychology 3

GEG213 Stress

Management 3

Total 20 17

61

Component

Semester 7

Course Credit

Hour

University Courses

Core Courses GTS411 Industrial

Training

6

Elective

Courses

Package 1 (Exercise

and Sport

Physiology)

GTS410

Contemporary Issue

in Sport Practices

3

OR

Package 2 (Coaching

Science)

GTS410

Contemporary Issue

in Sport Practices

3

OR

Package 3 (Exercise

and Sport

Psychology)

GTS410

Contemporary Issue

in Sport Practices

3

Total 9

62

5.6 Bachelor of Health Science (Medical Radiation)

Programme Aims

The Medical Radiation programme provides theoretical and practical training experiences,

which will allow students to understand, able to explain and utilise ionising and non-

ionising radiation in the diagnosis and treatment of patients.



PO1: Apply comprehensive knowledge in radiotherapy, medical imaging (including

nuclear medicine) and radiation protection.

PO2: Demonstrate competent technical skills in medical imaging and radiotherapy, as

well as to coordinate daily activities include implementation of corrective actions

and quality assurance.

PO3: Demonstrate thinking skills and provide solutions to address challenges in

medical imaging and radiotherapy practices using relevant techniques through

critical and lateral thinking.

PO4: Apply communication skills effectively in verbal and written forms with patients,

their family, peers, healthcare professionals and stakeholders, and present

information and findings coherently.

PO5: Demonstrate social and interpersonal skills to collaborate with other healthcare

professionals, as well as demonstrate sensitivities and responsibilities toward the

community, culture, religion and environment.

PO6: Adhere to legislative and ethical principles, the professional codes of conduct in

medical imaging, nuclear medicine and radiotherapy as well as the radiation

safety requirements and regulations.

PO7: Engage the principles of lifelong learning in academic and career development,

and able to utilise ICT and information management system to enhance medical

imaging, nuclear medicine and radiotherapy practices and skills.

PO8: Apply broad business and real working environment perspectives in workplace

and everyday activities, and demonstrate entrepreneurial skills and managerial

capabilities.

PO9: Demonstrate effective leadership skills and be able to work together with

healthcare team.



111 10 15 136

63


No. Course

Code Course

Credit

Hour





5 GTX104 Introduction to Medical Radiation 4

6 GTX105 Medical Radiation Physics I 4

7 GTX106 Mathematics of Radiation Science I 3

8 GTX107 Mathematics of Radiation Science II 4

9 GTX213 Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine 3

10 GTX214 Basic Sciences in Diagnostic Radiology 3

11 GTX215 Medical Radiation Physics II 4

12 GTX218 Radiation Protection and Safety I 4

13 GTX219 Basis of Radiation Dosimetry 4

14 GTX220 Diagnostic Radiology Imaging 4

15 GTX221 Nuclear Medicine Imaging 4




19 GTX307 Radiation Protection and Safety II 3

20 GTX326 Principles of Radiotherapy 4

21 GTX327 Brachytherapy 3

22 GTX328 Diagnostic Radiology Imaging Techniques 4

23 GTX329 Quality Assurance in Diagnostic Radiology 4

24 GTX330 Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques 4

25 GTX331 Quality Assurance in Nuclear Medicine and

Radiotherapy

4

26 GTX408 Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in

Radiotherapy

3

27 GTX411 Radiotherapy Techniques 4

28 GTX415 Research Project 8

29 GTX416 Professional Training 4

30 GTX417 Radiotherapy Treatment Planning Techniques 4


64


Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


IV 2

WUS101 Core

Entrepreneurship 2

WSC125 Futsal 1 LSP300 Academic English 2

WCC120 Batik Canting 1

Core

Courses







GTX105 Medical Radiation

Physics I 4


Behavioral Science 3

GTX107 Mathematics of

Radiation Science II 4

GTX104 Introduction to

Medical Radiation 4

GTX106 Mathematics of

Radiation Science I 3

Elective

Courses

GTJ108 Health

Communication and

Education

2


Management in Health

Organisations

2

Total 19 20

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


Civilisation 2





Medical English 2

Core

Courses

GTX215 Medical Radiation

Physics II 4

GTX219 Basis of Radiation

Dosimetry 4

GTX213 Basic Science of

Nuclear Medicine 3

GTX220 Diagnostic

Radiology Imaging 4

GTX214 Basic Sciences in

Diagnostic Radiology 3

GTX221 Nuclear Medicine

Imaging 4

GTX218 Radiation

Protection and Safety I 4

Elective

Courses

GEG216 Development of

Health Services in Malaysia 3

GTB225 Epidemiology 3

Total 20 19

65

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses

GTU304 Research

Methodology 3



GTX307 Radiation

Protection and Safety II 3 GTU302 Biostatistics 3

GTX326 Principles of

Radiotherapy 4 GTX327 Brachytherapy 3

GTX328 Diagnostic

Radiology Imaging

Techniques

4 GTX330 Nuclear Medicine

Imaging Techniques 4

GTX329 Quality Assurance

in Diagnostic Radiology 4

GTX331 Quality Assurance

in Nuclear Medicine and

Radiotherapy

4

Elective

Courses

Total 18 17

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses

GTX408 Dose Calculations

and Treatment Planning in

Radiotherapy

3 GTX415 Research Project (6/8)

GTX417 Radiotherapy

Treatment Planning

Techniques

4 GTX411 Radiotherapy

Techniques 4

GTX415 Research Project (2/8)

GTX416 Professional

Training 4

Elective

Courses

Total 13 10

66

5.7 Bachelor of Health Science (Nutrition)

Programme Aims

The Nutrition programme aims to deliver knowledge in the basic human nutrition and

focuses towards community nutrition to produce versatile graduates to fulfil the needs in

the future.



PO1: Apply comprehensive theoretical knowledge in nutrition to solve issue and to

overcome challenge in nutritional practices.

PO2: Apply technical skills in analysing, applying and solving nutritional problems in

community, conduct intervention and research.

PO3: Apply scientific thinking skills in implementing nutritional promotion and

intervention, as well as produce publications and nutritional guidelines.

PO4: Apply communication skills in presenting analytical findings to stakeholders.

PO5: Perform tasks in a team with heatlhcare professionals and demonstrate

sensitivities towards community in routine works.

PO6: Demonstrate ethical and professionalism in the field of nutrition, and adhere to

safety regulations.

PO7: Demonstrate ability to utilise ICT and information management skills to lifelong

career development.

PO8: Appreciate knowledge in entrepreneurial skills and practice good managerial

skills in decision making and planning.

PO9: Demonstrate leadership such as participating, taking role and leading community

project in the effort to apply nutritional knowledge for healthcare purpose.



106 15 15 136

67


No. Course

Code Course

Credit

Hour





5 GTN103 Food Science 3


7 GTN105 Principles of Food Preparation 3

8 GTN106 Food Analysis 3

9 GTN 208 Nutritional Biochemistry 3

10 GTN 215 Nutrition for Health and Fitness 3

11 GTN 217 Assessment of Nutritional Status 4

12 GTN 218 Nutrition in the Life Cycle 3

13 GTN 219 Food Anthropology 2

14 GTN 220 Nutrition Education and Promotion 3

15 GTN 221 Nutrition and Disease 3

16 GTD 213 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I 3

17 GTD 214 Dietetics Counselling and Communication 2

18 GTU 302 Biostatistics 3

19 GTU 304 Research Methodology 3

20 GTN 304 Nutrition Research Project I 4

21 GTN 305 Advanced Nutrition 3

22 GTN 311 Food Service Management 3

23 GTN 319 Food Microbiology 3

24 GTN 320 Nutrition and Dietetic Community Practicum 4

25 GTD 323 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II 3

26 GTN 402 Nutrition and Genetics 2

27 GTN 404 Food Security 2

28 GTN 406 Nutrition Practicum 18

29 GTN 410 Nutrition Research Project II 8


68


Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


IV 2 LSP300 Academic English 2


Digital Photography 1 WCC120 Batik Canting 1

Core

Courses









GTN103 Food Science 3 GTN105 Principles of Food

Preparation 3


Nutrition 3 GTN106 Food Analysis 3

Elective

Courses


Cardiopulmonary

Resuscitation


Total 17 18

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


Civilisation 2

WUS101 Core

Entrepreneurship 2



Medical English 2

WSC125 Futsal 1

Core

Courses

GTN208 Nutritional

Biochemistry 3

GTN217 Assessment of

Nutritional Status 4

GTN215 Nutrition for

Health and Fitness 3

GTN220 Nutrition Education

and Promotion 3

GTN218 Nutrition in the

Life Cycle 3


Disease 3

GTN219 Food

Anthropology 2


Medical Nutrition Therapy I 3

GTD214 Dietetics

Counselling and

Communication

2

Elective

Courses

GTU202 Health and Society 3

Total 18 20

69

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses

GTN319 Food

Microbiology 3

GTN304 Nutrition Research

Project I 4


Dietetic Community

Practicum

4 GTN311 Food Service

Management 3



II

3 GTU304 Research

Methodology 3

GTU302 Biostatistics 3

GTN305 Advanced

Nutrition 3

Elective

Courses

GEG304 Communication

and Self Development 2


Management in Healthcare

Organisations

2



Total 18 15

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses


Genetics 2 GTN406 Nutrition Practicum 18

GTN404 Food Security 2

GTN410 Nutrition Research

Project II 8

Elective

Courses

Total 12 18

70

5.8 Bachelor of Health Science (Speech Pathology)

Programme Aims

The Speech Pathology programme provides theoretical knowledge and clinical skills

needed in speech pathology with the aim to produce clinically competent graduates who

can deal with the identification, assessment, diagnosis, intervention and management of

communication disorders and swallowing problems.



PO1: Apply the principles and methods of assessment, intervention and prevention for

individual with communication and swallowing disorders.

PO2: Demonstrate comprehensive clinical competence in assessment, intervention and

prevention for communication and swallowing disorders.

PO3: Identify, formulate and execute effective solutions and decision in case

management process and demonstrate good clinical reasoning and reflection skills.

PO4: Communicate and provide counselling effectively to patients, family/caregivers,

healthcare professionals in verbal and written forms.

PO5: Serve individually or in a team with good interpersonal and social skills.

PO6: Understand and commit with professionalism, ethical and humanism to the

community, culture, religion and the environment, in line with the code of conduct

for speech pathologists.

PO7: Apply lifelong learning skills and professional development in speech sciences.

PO8: Self motivate and enhance entrepreneurial skills in career development.

PO9: Demonstrate effective leadership responsibility in workplace and community.



122 7 14 143

71


No. Course

Code Course

Credit

Hour



3 GTA106 Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech I 2

4 GTA107 Psychoacoustics 2

5 GTA109 Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech II 2

6 GTA110 Basic Audiology Techniques 3

7 GTP100 Basic Linguistics 3

8 GTP104 Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing 3

9 GTP109 Language Development 3

10 GTP110 Clinical Bases for Audiology and Speech Pathology 2

11 GTP111 Applied Linguistic for Speech Pathology 3

12 GTA205 Neurology for Hearing and Speech 2

13 GTA210 Otology 3

14 GTP203 Speech Pathology Clinic I 2

15 GTP207 Speech Pathology Clinic II 2

16 GTP210 Clinical Linguistics 2

17 GTP211 Paediatric for Hearing and Speech 3

18 GTP212 Abnormal Psychology 2

19 GTP213 Paediatric Language Disorder 3

20 GTP214 Speech Sound Disorders 3

21 GTP215 Hearing Impairment 3

22 GTP217 Introduction to Communication Disorders 3

23 GTP218 Acoustic and Phonetics 3

24 GTP216 Psycholinguistic 3



27 GTP303 Neuropsychology 2

28 GTP304 Speech Pathology Clinic III 3

29 GTP306 Voice and Resonance Disorders 3

30 GTP311 Counselling for Communication Disorders 3

31 GTP312 Augmentative and Alternative Communication 2

32 GTP313 Acquired Language Disorders 3

33 GTP314 Motor Speech Disorders 2

34 GTP315 Speech Pathology Clinic IV 3

35 GTP316 Learning Disabilities 3

36 GTP317 Swallowing Problems 2

37 GTP402 Research Project 6

38 GTP408 Fluency Disorders 2

39 GTP409 Speech Pathology Clinical Placement 6

40 GTP410 Ethics and Professionalism for Speech Pathology 2

41 GTP411 Speech Pathology Clinic V 5

42 GTP406 Speech Pathology Clinic VI 6


72


Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


IV 2 WCC120 Batik Canting 1

LSP300 Academic English 2

WSC125 Futsal 1

Core

Courses





GTA106 Anatomy and


Speech I

2

GTA 109 Anatomy and


Speech II

2

GTP100 Basic Linguistics 3 GTA110 Basic Audiology

Techniques 3

GTP109 Language

Development 3

GTP110 Clinical Bases for

Audiology and Speech

Pathology

2

GTP111 Applied Linguistic

for Speech Pathology 3

GTP 104 Developmental

Psychology for Speech and

Hearing

3

GTA107 Psychoacoustics 2

Elective

Courses



Total 19 19

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


Civilisation 2


WUS101 Core

Entrepreneurship 2

Core

Courses

GTP203 Speech Pathology

Clinic I 2

GTA205 Neurology for

Hearing and Speech 2

GTP210 Clinical

Linguistics 2


Clinic II 2

GTP211 Pediatric for

Hearing and Speech 3 GTA210 Otology 3

GTP212 Abnormal

Psychology 2

GTP214 Speech Sound

Disorders 3

GTP217 Introduction to

Communication Disorders 3

GTP213 Pediatric Language

Disorder 3

GTP218 Acoustic and

Phonetics 3 GTP215 Hearing Impairment 3

Elective

Courses

GTP219 Psycholinguistic 3

73

Total 21 19

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


Medical English 2

Core

Courses

GTU302 Biostatistics 3 GTP313 Acquired Language

Disorders 3

GTU304 Research

Methodology 3

GTP314 Motor Speech

Disorders 2

GTP303 Neuropsychology 2 GTP315 Speech Pathology

Clinic IV 3


Clinic III 3

GTP316 Learning

Disabilities 3

GTP306 Voice and

Resonance Disorders 3

GTP317 Swallowing

Problems 2

GTP311 Counselling for

Communication Disorders 3

GTP312 Augmentative and

Alternative Communication 2

Elective

Courses

GTA310 Basic Medical

Management for

Audiologist and Speech

Pathologist

2 GTP318 Evidence-Based

Practice 2


Health Professionals

3

Total 21 20

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses



Core

Courses

GTP402 Research Project 3 GTP402 Research Project 3


Clinical Placement 6


Clinic VI 6

GTP408 Fluency Disorders 2

GTP410 Ethics and

Professionalism for Speech

Pathology

2


Clinic V 5

Elective

Courses

Total 17 11

74

5.9 Bachelor of Science (Forensic Science)

Programme Aims

The Forensic Science programme is designed to provide the necessary theoretical

knowledge, practical skills and meaningful field experience needed in forensic science via

lectures, practical, field trips, fire scene simulation, forensic practicum training at various

government agencies.



PO1: Apply theoretical knowledge in forensic science.

PO2: Perform practical, procedure and research related to forensic science adhering to

standard requirements and quality control.

PO3: Utilise critical and creative thinking skills as well as scientific thinking to identify

and solve problems.

PO4: Communicate effectively in verbal and written forms to deliver information,

findings and results within forensic science context with clients, peers and the

stakeholders.

PO5: Demonstrate the skills and social responsibilities, teamwork and sensitive in

coordinating daily activities of forensic science practice with various profession

and community involving different religions, culture and environments.

PO6: Demonstrate high level of moral and values as well as ethical and professionalism

in adhering to ethical principles, code of conduct, law and regulations in forensic

science practices.

PO7: Utilise skills in information and communication technology (ICT), information

management system and lifelong learning in academic and career development.

PO8: Apply managerial and entrepreneurial skills in everyday activities and planning

by considering the actual scenario and from different perspectives.

PO9: Utilise knowledge and understanding in leadership for effective leadership in the

effort to contribute in the advancement of forensic science.



124 6 15 145

75


No. Course

Code Course

Credit

Hour





5 GTF110 Physical Chemistry 4

6 GTF112 Inorganic Chemistry 4

7 GTF113 Analytical Chemistry I 4

8 GTF114 Analytical Chemistry II 4

9 GTF115 Organic Chemistry I 4

10 GTF200 Criminalistics 3

11 GTF204 Forensic Psychology 3

12 GTF210 Material Chemistry 3

13 GTF214 Pollution and Environmental Chemistry 3

14 GTF216 Analytical Chemistry III 4

15 GTF217 Organic Chemistry II 4

16 GTF218 Organic Chemistry III 4

17 GTF219 Physical Evidence 3

18 GTF220 Forensic Serology 2

19 GTB204 Molecular Biology Techniques 3



22 GTF305 Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drugs 4

23 GTF306 Fire Investigation 3

24 GTF309 Forensic DNA Analysis 3

25 GTF311 Forensic Anthropology 3

26 GTF313 Food Chemistry 3

27 GTF315 Biological Evidence 3

28 GTF316 Natural Products Chemistry 3

29 GTF317 Introduction to Criminology 3

30 GTF400 Forensic Medicine 3

31 GTF402 Ballistics and Explosives Chemistry 4

32 GTF407 Forensic Practicum 8

33 GTF408 Forensic Documents Examination 2

34 GTF409 Statistics for Forensic Science 2

35 GTF410 Forensic Digital Evidence 2

36 GTF411 Research Project 8


76


Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


IV 2

WUS101 Core

Entrepreneurship 2


Core

Courses






Behavioural Science 3 GTF110 Physical Chemistry 4

GTU106 Biochemistry and

Basic Genetics 3

GTF114 Analytical

Chemistry II 4

GTF112 Inorganic

Chemistry 4 GTF115 Organic Chemistry I 4

GTF113 Analytical

Chemistry I 4

Elective

Courses LAA100 Arabic Language I 2

Total 20 21

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses


Civilisation 2





Medical English 2

Core

Courses

GTF200 Criminalistics 3 GTF210 Material Chemistry 3

GTF204 Forensic

Psychology 3

GTF214 Pollution and

Environmental Chemistry 3

GTF216 Analytical

Chemistry III 4

GTF218 Organic Chemistry

III 4

GTF217 Organic Chemistry

II 4 GTF219 Physical Evidence 3

GTF220 Forensic Serology 2

Elective

Courses

GEG304 Communication and

Self Development 2

Total 20 18

77

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses WSC125 Futsal 1

Core

Courses

GTB204 Molecular

Biology Techniques 3 GTU302 Biostatistics 3

GTF305 Forensic

Toxicology and Chemistry

of Drugs

4 GTU304 Research

Methodology 3

GTF306 Fire Investigation 3 GTF309 Forensic DNA

Analysis 3

GTF315 Biological

Evidence 3

GTF311 Forensic

Anthropology 3

GTF316 Natural Products

Chemistry 3 GTF313 Food Chemistry 3

GTF317 Introduction to

Criminology 3

Elective

Courses

GEG309 Principles of

Forensic Dentistry 2

Total 19 18

Component


Course Credit

Hour Course

Credit

Hour

University

Courses

Core

Courses

GTF400 Forensic Medicine 3 GTF402 Ballistics and

Explosives Chemistry 4

GTF409 Statistics for

Forensic Science 2 GTF407 Forensic Practicum 8

GTF410 Forensic Digital

Evidence 2

GTF408 Forensic Documents

Examination 2

GTF411 Research Project 8

Elective

Courses

Total 15 14

78

6.0 COURSE SYNOPSIS

6.1 FOUNDATION COURSES

GTU101 Structure and Function of Human I

This course introduces students to basic anatomy and physiology of humans. It covers the

anatomical and physiological aspects of the various human organ systems, which includes

cell and tissue, skeletal system, muscular system, cardiovascular system, nervous system

and special senses such as vision, hearing, smell and taste. It also includes basic teaching

and dynamic transfer of knowledge that emphasis on human health. The course will be

conducted via lecture, practical and discussion. Students’ knowledge will be assessed

through tests, practical tests/OSPE and final examination, while their thinking skills will

be assessed through assignments.

List of text/reference books:

1. G.J. Tortora and B.H. Derrickson, Principles of anatomy and physiology (13th

Ed.), John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2011.

2. E.N. Marieb and K.N. Hoehn, Human Anatomy and Physiology (7th Ed.),

Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co, 2008.

3. B. Young and J.W. Heath, Wheater’s Functional Histology: A Text and Color

Atlas (5th Ed.), Churchill Livingstone, 2006.

4. K.E. Barrett, S.M. Barman, S. Boitano and H.L. Brooks, Ganong’s Review of

Medical Physiology (23rd Ed.), McGraw Hill Lange, 2010.

GTU103 Fundamental of Health Informatics The course introduces students to health informatics emphasising fundamental concepts of

information and communication technology (ICT) and their and applications in the field of

health sciences. The lectures cover computer system (hardware, software, networking and

database), cyber crime and information security, computer ethics and laws. For the

practicals, it covers e-learning, Office Suite (Word Processor, Presentation and

Spreadsheet), website development, graphic and animation editing applications. The

course will be conducted via lecture, practical and group discussions including electronic

forum. The students will be assessed through tests, assignments, practical test and final

examination.


1. Laudon K. and Laudon J., Essentials of Management Information Systems

(10th Ed.), Prentice Hall, 2012.

2. Hebda, T.L. and Czar P., Handbook of Informatics for Nurses & Healthcare

Professionals (5th Ed), 2012.

3. Hoyt R.E., Bailey N. and Yoshihashi A., Health Informatics: Practical Guide for

Healthcare and Information Technology Professionals, (5thEd.), Lulu.com, 2012.

4. Joos I., Nelson R. and Smith M. J., Introduction to Computers for Healthcare

Professionals (5th Ed.), Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2010.

5. Ralph M. S. and George W. R. (2016), Fundamentals of Information Systems, 8th

Edition, Cengage Learning.

6. Shelly, G. B., & Vermaat, M. E. (2011). Discovering Computers, Complete: Your

Interactive Guide to the Digital World: Cengage Learning.

79

GTU104 Structure and Function of Human II

This course introduces students to basic anatomy and physiology of humans. It covers

anatomical and physiological of the respiratory, renal, gastrointestinal, endocrine and

reproductive systems as well as the skin. It also includes basic teaching and dynamic

transfer of knowledge that emphasis on human health. The course will be conducted via

lecture, practical and discussions. Students’ knowledge will be assessed through

assignments, tests, practical tests/OSPE and final examination.


1. G.J. Tortora and B.H. Derrickson, Principles of anatomy and physiology (13th

Ed.), John Wiley & Sons Inc, 2011.

2. E.N. Marieb and K.N. Hoehn, Human Anatomy and Physiology (7th Ed.),

Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co, 2008.

3. B. Young and J.W. Heath, Wheater’s Functional Histology: A Text and Color

Atlas (5th Ed.), Churchill Livingstone, 2006.

4. K.E. Barrett, S.M. Barman, S. Boitano and H.L. Brooks, Ganong’s Review of

Medical Physiology (23rd Ed.), McGraw Hill Lange, 2010.

GTU105 Psychology and Behavioural Science

This course provides students with basic theoretical knowledge and principles of

psychology. Developmental psychology including psychology of infants, children and

adolescents together with factors that influence them like familial and external factors will

be covered. Principles of behavioural sciences with respect to personality, motivation,

emotion, attitude, management of mental stress and counseling techniques will also be

introduced.


1. Feldman, R.S., Understanding Psychology (12th ed.). McGraw-Hill, 2015.

2. Coon D., Introduction to Psychology (10th Ed.). San Francisco: Wadsworth, 2015.

3. Wedding, D., Their, S.O. and Daschle T., Behavior and Medicine (3rd Ed.). NY:

Hogrefe & Huber Publishers, 2001.

GTU106 Biochemistry and Basic Genetics

This course introduces students to basic principles of biochemistry and genetics. It covers

the structures and functions of cellular organelles, chemical bonds, structures and functions

of biomolecules as well as the basic genetics, which includes the structures and functions

of DNA and RNA as the genetic materials, replication, transcription, translation, Mendel’

Law and other traits inheritance as well as population genetics. This course will be

conducted through lectures, tutorials, practical and assignments. The students will be

assessed through continuous assessment, laboratory reports, assignment and final

examination.


80

1. Mckee, T. and McKee, J.R., Biochemistry: the molecular basis of life, 5th edition.

Oxford University Press, USA, 2011.

2. Murray, R., Bender, D., Botham, K.M., Kennelly, P.J., Rodwell, V. and Weil,

P.A. Harper's biochemistry, 29th edition McGraw-Hill Medical, 2012.

3. Horton, H.A., Principles of Biochemistry, 4th edition. Upper Saddle River, NJ :

Prentice Hall, 2006.

4. Boyer, R., Concepts in Biochemistry, 3rd edition. John Wiley & Sons Inc, US,

2006.

5. Thomas M. Devlin, Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical Correlation (7th Ed.),

Wiley, 2010.

GTU202 Health and Society

This course scrutinises problems and development of health from the sociological and

anthropological underpinnings as an alternative to biomedical perspectives. The concepts

of health and disease, the relationship between health and behavior, the influence of

culture, religion and social class (poverty) in the prevention of disease, and the introduction

of gender issues and rights will be discussed. Students will also be introduced to health

system which is associated with the welfare of society and its impact on certain groups in

society. This course will be conducted via lectures and tutorials. Students will be assessed

through essay writing, seminar and final examination.


1. Weiss, Gregory L. and Lynne E. Lonnquist, The Sociology of Health, Healing,

and Illness (6th Ed.), Pearson Education Inc. New Jersey, 2006.

2. Helman C., Culture Health and Illness. Oxford: Butterworth Heinemann, 2000.

3. Matcha D.A., Medical Sociology, Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2000.

4. Weitz, R., The Sociology of Health, Illness and Health Care: A Critical Approach.

Belmont, CA: Wadswarth/Thomson Learning, 2001.

GTU301 Ethics and Law for Healthcare Professionals

This course emphasises the relationship of morality, ethics and law. Students will be

exposed to the importance of ethics in everyday life as well as in professional

infrastructure. Basic concepts of morality, human rights, confidentiality, consent and the

relationship between professional experts and clients will also be discussed in detail.

Students will be exposed to the theory of ethics as well as examples of cases in order to

understand the subject further. Students will be assessed through tests and final

examination, while the soft skills such as communication skills, values and professional

attitudes will be assessed through presentations, small group discussions and essay writing.


1. Amstrong, S.J. and Botzler, R., The animal Ethics Reader, Routledge, London,

2003.

2. Beauchamp, T.L. and Walters, L., Contemporary Issues in Bioethics (6th Ed),

Wadsworth: USA, 2003.

3. Berg et al. Informed consent, Oxford University press, 2001.

4. Crues, R. et al., Professionalism an ideal to be maintained. The Lancet. 356

(9224): 156-159, 2000.

81

5. Eckenwiler, Lisa A, and Cohn, Felicia, G (eds), The Ethics of Bioethics –

Mapping the Moral Landscape, The John Hopkins University press, 2007.

GTU302 Biostatistics

This course introduces students to the basic knowledge of biostatistics in medicine and

health. It also covers the fundamental application of statistical tools in health data

collection, qualitative and quantitative data analysis as well as interpretation of results. The

course will be conducted via lectures and other student centered learning activities, based

on the simulate data related with current health issues in Malaysia. This could enhance

students’ awareness on the importance of health and then enabling them to have sustainable

healthy lifestyle. The students will be assessed through tests, report, assignments,

discussion and final examination.


1. Kim, M.J. and Mallory, C., Statistics for Evidence-based Practice in Nursing.

Jones & Bartlett Learning, 2014.

2. Abdullah, M. L. dan Wan Muhamad Amir W. A., Analisis Data Dengan Statistik

Asas. Penerbit Universiti Malaysia Terengganu, 2013.

3. Nor Azwany Yaacob et al., Research Methodology in Health Sciences (1st Ed.),

Pustaka Aman Press Sdn Bhd, Kelantan, 2012.

4. Daniel, W.W., A Foundation for Analysis in the Health Sciences (8th Ed.), John

Wiley & Sons, 2008.

GTU304 Research Methodology

This course introduces students to various important concepts and aspects in research

methodology in health sciences. It encompasses the characteristics, types and approaches

in research usually employed by researchers. Students will learn how to identify problems

to study, develop hypotheses and research questions, specify variables and check for the

validity and reliability of studies as well as to design research proposals. Students will be

exposed to broad range of designs used in research from laboratory and field experiments,

surveys, focus groups and in-depth interviewing. The process of scientific enquiry,

including critical evaluation of research proposal, data analysis and research report writing

will be given greater emphasis. Students will be assessed through research proposal

preparation, presentation, test, assignment and final examination.


1. Thomas D.R. and Hodges I.D., Designing and Managing Your Research Project:

Core Skills for Social and Health Research. London. SAGE Publications Ltd,

2013.

2. Chua Y.P., Mastering research Methods. Kuala Lumpur, McGraw Hill Education,

2012.

3. Neuman, W. L. (eds), Understanding Research. Pearson Education, Boston, 2009.

4. Abdul Aziz Al Safi I., Kamarul Imran M., Muhamed Rusli A., Nor Azwany Y.

and Wan Mohd Zahiruddin W.M. Research Methodology in Health Sciences (2nd

Ed.), Kelantan, PPSP Publications, 2015.

6.2 CORE COURSES LEVEL 1

GTA106 Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech I

82

This course introduces students to the terminologies related to body orientation, cell

structures, primary tissues and organisation of the human organ systems. It also covers the

applied anatomy and physiology of the respiratory, phonatory, articulation and swallowing

systems which involved in the speech mechanism. This course will be conducted via

lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and problem based learning (PBL). The students will

be assessed through test, practical examination (OSPE), presentation and final

examination.


1. Fuller D.R., Pimentel J.T. & Peregoy B.M., Applied Anatomy & Physiology for

Speech-Language Pathology & Audiology. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012.

2. Seikel J.A., King D.W. & Drumright D.G., Anatomy and Physiology for Speech,

Language, and Hearing (4th Ed.), Delmar Cengage Learning, 2010.

3. Booth K.A. & Wyman T.D., Anatomy, Physiology, and Pathophysiology for

Allied Health (2nd Ed.), McGraw-Hill, 2009.

GTA107 Psychoacoustics

This course introduces students to important elements of psychoacoustics such as auditory

response area, concept of hearing threshold, concept of loudness, pitch, masking, temporal

and space perception. It also covers the effects of auditory disorders on the psychoacoustics

functions. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions.

Students will be assessed through tests, presentation, practical reports and final

examination.


1. Johnson, K., Acoustic and Auditory Phonetics (3rd Ed.): Wiley-Blackwell, 2011.

2. Warren, R. M., Auditory Perception: An Analysis and Synthesis (3rd Ed.):

Cambridge University Press, 2008.

3. Howard, D. & Angus, J., Acoustics and Psychoacoustics (4th Ed.), Focal Press,

2009.

4. Gelfand, S. A., Hearing: An Introduction to Psychological and Physiological

Acoustics (5th Ed.): Informa Healthcare, 2009.

5. Schnupp, J., Nelken, I., & King, A., Auditory Neuroscience: Making Sense of

Sound: The MIT Press, 2012.

GTA109 Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech II

This course introduces students to the aspects of applied human anatomy and physiology

which covers the nervous, auditory and vestibular systems. This course will be conducted

via lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and problem based learning (PBL). The students

will be assessed through test, practical exam (OSPE), presentation and final examination.


1. Fuller D.R., Pimentel J.T. & Peregoy B.M., Applied Anatomy & Physiology for

Speech-Language Pathology & Audiology. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012

83

2. Seikel J.A., King D.W. & Drumright D.G., Anatomy and Physiology for Speech,

Language, and Hearing (4th Ed), Delmar Cengage Learning, 2010.

3. Booth K.A. & Wyman T.D., Anatomy, Physiology, and Pathophysiology for

Allied Health (2nd Ed.). McGraw-Hill, 2009.

4. Clark, W. F., & Ohlemiller, K., Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing for

Audiologist. Singular Publishing Group, 2004.

5. Linda M Luxon, Textbook of audiological medicine: Clinical aspects of Hearing

and Balance, 2003.

GTA110 Basic Audiology Techniques

This course introduces students to fundamental sound characteristics and basic components

of audiological instruments. Students will also learn the basic of audiological diagnostic

procedures such as history taking, otoscopic examination, pure tone audiometry,

tympanometry and speech audiometry. This course also covers introduction to the

audiology diagnostic and auditory system disorders. This course will be conducted via

lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and case study. Students will be assessed through test,

assignment, practical report and final examination.


1. Gelfand, S. A., Essentials of Audiology, United States of America: Thieme, 2009.

2. Katz, J., Medwetsky, L., Burkard, R., & Hood, L. (Eds.), Handbook of Clinical

Audiology, United States of America: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.

3. Kramer, S., & Guthrie, L., Audiology Workbook, San Diego: Plural Publishing

Inc., 2008.

4. Roeser, R. J., Valente, M., & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology Diagnosis, United

States of America: Thieme, 2007.

Hunter, L., & Shahnaz, N., Acoustic Immittance Measures Basic and Advanced

Practice, San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2012.

GTB105 Human Biochemistry

This course introduces students to the aspects of human biochemistry. It covers knowledge

and principles in protein, carbohydrate and lipid metabolism, hormones and their

mechanisms, water and electrolyte balance, acid and base balance, types, functions and

mechanisms of macro and micro minerals. The elements of occupational health and safety

of working in a laboratory are incorporated into the course during practical sessions. This

course will be conducted through lectures, tutorials, practical and discussions. The students

will be assessed through tests, assignment, laboratory reports and final examination.


1. Boyer, R. Concepts in Biochemistry (3rd Ed.), John Wiley & Sons Inc, US, 2006.

2. Horton, H.A. Principles of biochemistry (4th Ed.), Upper Saddle River, NJ :


3. Mckee, T. and McKee, J.R. Biochemistry: the molecular basis of life (5th Ed.),

Oxford University Press, USA, 2011.

84

4. Murray, R., Bender, D., Botham, K.M., Kennelly, P.J., Rodwell, V. and Weil,

P.A. Harper's biochemistry (29th Ed.), McGraw-Hill Medical, 2012.

GTB106 Laboratory Science

This course introduces students to aspect of laboratory safety the basic laboratory

techniques, management and maintenance of laboratory equipment which covers

professional attitude and ethics, safety methods and disposal of dangerous chemicals,

storage and maintenance of chemicals and reagents, use of laboratory plastics and glasses,

sterilization and disinfection, principle of quality management, receiving and managing

specimens. Students will also be trained in using and maintaining laboratory equipment

such as micropipette, centrifuge, pH meter, balances, spectrophotometer and other

common laboratory analytical equipment. It will also emphasise on the reduction in energy

and disposable items used. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials, practical

and discussions. The students will be assessed through tests, laboratory reports and final

examination.


1. Bauer J.D. Clinical Laboratory Methods (12th Ed.), The C.V. Mosby Company,

St. Louis, 1990.

2. Britt M.S. and Fisher F.W. Williams’ Introduction to the Profession of Medical

Technology (9th Ed.), Lea and Febiger, Philadelphia, 1991.

3. Estridge, B.H. and Reynolds, A.P. Basic Clinical Laboratory Techniques (5th.

Ed.), Delmar. Publ. Inc. USA, 2008.

4. Henry J.B. Clinical Diagnosis and Management by Laboratory Methods (18th

Ed.), W.B. Saunders Company Philadelphia, 1990.

5. Gault V.A. and Mc Clenaghan, N.H. Understanding Bioanalytical Chemistry-

Principles and Applications (1st Ed.) Wiley-Blackwell, UK, 2009.

GTB110 Basic Microbiology

This course introduces students to basic principles in microbiology including bacteria,

viruses, fungus and parasites. It covers microbial diversity, genetic, physiology,

biochemistry, reproduction, host-microorganism interaction and basic clinical

microbiology. The course will be conducted via lecture, practical and seminar. Students’

knowledge will be assessed through tests and final examination, while their soft skills such

as communication and teamwork will be assessed through presentations.


1. Black, J.G. Microbiology, Principles and Explorations (6th Ed.), John Wiley

Publication, 2006.

2. Brooks, G.F., Carroll, K.C., Butel, J.S. and Morse, S.A. Jawetz, Melnick and

Adelberg’s Medical Microbiology (24th Ed.) Connecticut: Prentice-Hall

International Inc, 2007.

85

3. Nester, E.W., Anderson, D.G., Roberts, C.E. and Nester, M.T. Microbiology, A

Human Perspective (6th Ed.), McGraw Hill, USA, 2009.

4. Prescott, L.M., Harley, J.P. and Klein, D.A. Microbiology. 5th ed. McGraw Hill,

USA, 2002.

5. Willey, J.M., Sherwood, L.M. and Woolverton, C.J. Prescott’s Microbiology (8 th

Ed.), McGraw Hill, USA, 2011.

GTF101 Basic Chemistry

This course introduces students to various topics on basic knowledge of chemistry

including atom, molecules, ions, gases, reactions in aqueous solutions, chemical kinetics,

entropy, free energy, acid base equilibrium, periodic table, nuclear chemistry,

electrochemistry and chemistry in atmosphere. The course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials and student centred learning activities. Students will be assessed via test,

assignments and final examination.


1. Chang R., Chemistry (10th Ed.), Pearson Education, 2015.

2. Chang R., General Chemistry: The Essential Concept (4th Ed.), McGraw Hill,

2013.

3. Baner R., Birk J. and Mark P.S. A Conceptual Introduction to Chemistry (2nd Ed.),

McGraw Hill, 2010.

GTF110 Physical Chemistry

This course introduces students to the basic theories and principles in physical chemistry,

including gas and gas kinetic theory, molecule collision, gas transportation phenomenon,

as well as chemical kinetics and thermodynamics. This course will be conducted via

lectures, tutorials and discussion. Students will be assessed through test, discussion,

assignments and final examination.


1. D. Ronis, Introductory to Physical Chemistry, McGill University, 2011.

2. T. Engel and P. Reid, Physical Chemistry, Prentice Hall, 2010.

3. P. Atkins and J. D. Paula, Physical Chemistry, (9th Ed.), Oxford University Press,

2009.

4. R. J. Silbey, R. A. Alberty and M. G. Bawendi, Physical Chemistry, (4th Ed.), John

Wiley, 2004.

GTF112 Inorganic Chemistry

This course introduces students to the basic theories and principles in inorganic chemistry,

including stoichiometry, periodic table, atomic electron, chemical bonds, structure,

properties and application of solids, as well as nuclear chemistry. This course will be

conducted via lectures, tutorial and practical. Students will be assessed through test,

presentation, practical reports, quiz and final examination.

86


1. C. Hoasecroft and A. G. Shaspe, Inorganic Chemistry (4th Ed.), Prentice-Hall,

2012.

2. R. H. Petrucci, W. S. Harwood and F. G. Herring, General Chemistry: Principles

and Modern Applications, (10th Ed.), Prentice-Hall, Inc., New Jersey, 2010.

3. G. L. Miessler and D. A. Tarr, Inorganic Chemistry (3rd Ed.,), Prentice-Hall, 2003.

4. T. L. Brown, H. E. LeMay, B. E. Bursten and J. R. Burdge, Chemistry: The

Central Science, (9th Ed.), Pearson Education Inc., 2003.

GTF113 Analytical Chemistry I

This course introduces students to the principles and techniques in analytical chemistry,

including concentration expression, chemical equilibrium, gravimetry analysis, acid-base

equilibrium and titration, precipitation titration as well as complexometry titration. This

course will be conducted via lectures, tutorial and practical. Students will be assessed

through test, assignment, practical reports, quiz and final examination.


1. D. A. Skoog, D. M. West, F. J. Holler and S. R. Crouch, Fundamentals of

Analytical Chemistry (9th Ed.), Thomson Brooks/ Cole, 2014.

2. G. D. Christian, Analytical Chemistry (6th Ed.), John Wiley & Sons, 2007.

3. D. B. Harvey, Modern Analytical Chemistry, International Ed., Mc-Graw Hill,

2000.

GTF114 Analytical Chemistry II

This course introduces students to the principles and techniques in analytical chemistry. It

covers electrochemistry, potentiometry, polarography, voltammetry, separation

techniques, gas chromatography and high performance liquid chromatography. This course

will be conducted via lectures, discussion, PBL and practical. Students will be assessed



1. Hoffmann, E., Mass Spectrometry: Principles and Applications (3rd Ed.), West

Sussex: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2007.

2. Niessen, W.M., Liquid Chromatography--Mass Spectrometry (3rd Ed.), Boca

Raton: CRC/Taylor & Francis, 2006.

3. Aguilar, M., Solvent Extraction and Liquid Membranes, New York: Marcel

Dekker, 2004.

4. Welz, B., Atomic Absorption Spectrometry (3rd Ed.), Weinheim: Wiley-VCH,

1999.

GTF115 Organic Chemistry I

This course introduces students to the fundamental concepts of organic chemistry,

characteristics and chemical reactions for organic compounds including alkane, alkene,

alkyne and alkyl halide. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorial and practical.

Students will be assessed through tests, assignment, practical reports, quiz and final

examination.

87


1. Wade L.G., Organic Chemistry (8th Ed.), Pearson Prentice Hall, 2013.

2. Solomons T.W.G., Fryhle C.B, and Snyder S.A., Organic Chemistry (11th Ed.).

Wiley, 2013.

3. Smith J.G and Smith J.G., Organic Chemistry (3rd Ed.), McGraw Hill, 2011.

4. McMurry J.E., Organic Chemistry (8th Ed.), Brooks/Cole, 2011.

GTK101 Introduction to Environmental and Occupational Health

This course serves as an introduction to the area of environmental health, occupational

health, environmental safety, and occupational safety. It covers the importance of

responsibility and civil liberties of an individual towards the environment. Current issues

on environmental disaster will be discussed towards its implications on water quality,

community health and biodiversity. Hence students will understand the disaster risk

management for maintaining the sustainability of the environment, health and biodiversity.

The implication and significant of nurturing environmental and occupational health will be

also highlighted. This course will be conducted via lectures and seminars.


1. Yassri A., Kjellstrom T., Theo de Kok & Guidotti T., Basic Environmental

Health, Oxford University Press; New York, 2001.

2. Megan. Environment, Health and Sustainable, Open University Press; London,

2006.

3. Harper, C.L., Environment and Society; Human Perspectives on Environmental

Issues, Upper Saddler River; Pearson Prentice Hall, 2004.

GTK105 Occupational Safety

This course introduces student to various safety hazards at workplaces. Measures required

to minimise risks of work injury due to these hazards will be discussed. Content of this

course is streamlined with content of module IV of the Safety and Health Officer course as

regulated by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health (DOSH). This course will

be conducted in the form of lectures, tutorials and field trips. Introduction to hazards, risk

assessment and improvement measures are important basic concepts needed by students in

the context of job safety that takes into account the safety of employees, visitors and people

in the working environment. Aspects of sustainability are also highlighted. Students will

be tested with tests, quizzes, assignments, presentations and final examination.


1. Akta Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 dan Peraturan-Peraturan.

Undang-Undang Malaysia, ILBS, 2005.

2. Akta Kilang dan Jentera 1967 dan Peraturan-Peraturan. Undang-undang

Malaysia, ILBS, 2005.

3. Lingard, H. & Rowlinson, S.M. Occupational Health and Safety in Construction

Project Management, Taylor & Francis, 2005.

4. Manuele, F.A. On the Practice of Safety (3rd Ed). Wiley-IEEE, 2003.

88

5. Reese, C.D. Occupational Safety and Health Management: A Practical Approach,

CRC Press, 2003.

GTK106 Occupational Health

This course introduces students to the information of occupational health. Information

about types of hazard which can cause danger and affect health, screening method,

assessment at workplace, monitoring of health risk and management will be introduced.

Course content is streamlined with content of module III of the Safety and Health Officer

course as regulated by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health (DOSH),

Ministry of Human Resources. This course will be conducted via lectures and fieldwork.

Students will be assessed through test, practical report, report, assignment, seminar and

final examination.


1. Westerholm, P. Professional Ethics in Occupational Health-Western European

Perspectives. Radcliffe Medical Press. 2007.

2. Barling, J., Kelloway, E.K. & Frone, M.R. Handbook of Work Stress. SAGE.

2004.

3. Westerholm, P., Nilsun T. & Øvretveit J. Practical Ethics in Occupational Health.

Radcliffe Medical Press. 2004.

4. Stranks, J.W. Health and Safety at Work: Key Terms. Butterworth-

Heinemann.2002.

5. Rampal, K.G & Noor Hassim I. Occupational Safety and Health in Malaysia,

NIOSH. Kuala Lumpur. 1997.

GTN103 Food Science

This course introduces students to the fundamental of food science and various

physicochemical properties in food. It also covers the practical session pertaining to basic

food science. This course will be conducted via lectures, practical and discussion sessions.

Students will be assessed through continuous assessment, practical report and final

examination.


1. Amy Brown, Understanding Food: Principles & Preparation (4th Ed.), Thomson

Wardsworth Pub., 2011.

2. Mehas KY and Rodgers SL., Food Science: Biochemistry of Food and Nutrition

(4th Ed.), McGraw-Hill Com., 2002.

3. Norman N. Potter and Joseph H. Hotchkiss, Food Sciences (5th Ed.), Aspen

Publishers, Inc., 1998.

GTN104 Principles of Nutrition

This course introduces students to the structure and role of major macro and micro-

nutrients in human health. It also covers function, requirement, effect of nutrient deficiency

or excess, and source of each nutrient. This course will be conducted via lectures and

discussion. Students will be assessed through test, assignment and final examination.


89

1. McGuire M & Beerman K., Nutritional Sciences: From Fundamentals to Food

(3rd Ed.), Thomson Woodsworth, 2013.

2. Gibney M, Vorster H & Kok F., Introduction to Human Nutrition (1st Ed.),

Blackwell Sciences Limited, 2002.

3. Mahan LK & Arlin M, Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy (13th Ed.),

Philadelphia: Elsevier Science, 2012.

GTN105 Principles of Food Preparation

This course introduces students to basic cooking of various foods such as meat, chicken,

fish, vegetables, cereals and bakery products. It covers new technique in food preparation

such as microwave oven. The aspects of cleanliness, sanitation and safety during food

preparation are also included. This course will be conducted via lectures, practical and

discussion session. Students will be assessed through test, practical report, presentation,

assignment and final examination.


1. Amy Brown, Understanding Food: Principles & Preparation (4th Ed.), Thomson

Wardsworth Pub., 2011.

2. Wayne Gisslen and J. Gerard Smith, Professional Cooking (7th Ed), John Wiley

& Sons Inc, New Jersey, 2010.

3. David A Mizer, Mary Porter, Beth Sonner and Karen Eich Drummond, Food

Preparation for the Professional (3rd Ed.), John Wiley & Sons Inc, USA, 2000.

GTN106 Food Analysis

This course introduces students to sampling methods, sample preparation prior to analysis

and principle involved in determining nutrient content in foods. Students will perform

various tasks such as proximate, calorie, fibre and texture profile analysis in foods. This

course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials, practical sessions and discussion. Students

will be assessed through test, practical reports and final examination.


1. Susan Neilsen, Food Analysis (4th Ed.), Springer, New York, USA, 2010.

2. Pomeranz Yeshajahu & Clifton E. Meloan, Food Analysis: Theory and practice

(3rd Ed.) Aspen Publishers, New York, USA, 2000.

3. Multon J.L., Analysis of Food Constituents, John Wiley & Sons, 1997.

GTP100 Basic Linguistics

This course introduces students to basic linguistics. It covers linguistics components such

as phonology, morphology, syntax, semantic and pragmatic. Discussion on linguistics

components focuses on Malay, with comparison to English. This course will be conducted

via lectures and tutorials. Students will be assessed through quiz, assignment and final

examination.


http://www.betterworldbooks.com/list.aspx?SearchTerm=Smith%2c+J.+Gerard

90

1. Akmajian, A., Demers, R., Farmer, A., Harnish, R., Linguistics: An Introduction

to Language and Communication (6th Ed.), The MIT Press, 2010.

2. Nik Safiah Karim, Farid M. Onn, Hashim Musa, Tatabahasa Dewan, Kuala

Lumpur: DBP, 2003.

3. Aronoff, M., Rees-Miller, J. (Eds.), Handbook of Linguistics. Blackwell

Publishers, 2003.

4. Fasold, R. & Connor-Linton, J. (Eds), An Introduction to Language & Linguistics,

Cambridge, 2006.

5. Cruse, A., Meaning in Language: An Introduction to Semantic and Pragmatics,

Oxford University Press, 2004.

6. Black, M., &Chiat, S., Linguistics for Clinician, A Practical Introduction.

London: Hodder Arnold, 2003.

GTP104 Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing

This course offers a comprehensive account of human development from conception to

adolescence, and adult ages. Discussion will be concentrated on the major theories and

topic that pervades almost all areas of development, as well as the chronological divisions

of infancy, early childhood, middle childhood, adolescence, and adulthood. The goal of

this course is to introduce Audiology and Speech Language Pathology student to the

dynamic, interdisciplinary field of human development across the life span.


1. Shaffer, D.R. & Kipp, K., Developmental Psychology: Childhood and

Adolescence (9th Ed.), Cengage Learning, Inc., 2013.

2. OH, US. Slater, A. & Bremner, J.G., An Introduction to Developmental

Psychology, John Wiley & Sons Inc., NY, 2017.

3. Crandell, T., Crandell, C. & Zanden, J.V., Human Development (10th Ed.),

McGraw Hill, NY, 2012.

4. Whitebread, D., Developmental Psychology and Early Childhood Education: A

Guide for Students and Practitioners, SAGE Pub, US, 2011.

5. Leman, P., Bremner, A., Parke, R.D., & Gauvain, M., Developmental

Psychology, McGraw Hill, Europe, 2102.

GTP109 Language Development

This course introduces students to theories related to normal acquisition and development

of language. The fundamental of language, speech and cognitive development which

rooted from the normal neurobiology and motor development during infancy will be

discussed. It also covers the social development during childhood and its influence to the

higher level language development during pre-school and school-age. The higher level

language development such as literacy, conversational aspects and narrative are also

covered in this course up until adolescent and adulthood. This course will be conducted via

lectures, tutorials, and seminar. Students are assessed through assignment, report, quiz and

final examination.


1. Owens, R.E., Language Development: An Introduction (9th Ed.), Pearson

Education, 2016.

91

2. Owens, R.E., Language Disorders: A Functional Approach to Assessment and

Intervention (4th Ed.), Allyn & Bacon, 2003.

3. Bennet-Kastor, T., Analysing Children’s Language, Basil Blackwell, 1990.

4. Lund, N.J. & Duchan, J., Assessing children’s language in naturalistic context (3rd

Ed.), New Jersy: Prentice Hall, 1993.

GTP110 Clinical Bases for Audiology and Speech Pathology

This course provides initial exposure to the foundation of clinical skills and patient

management such as clinical observation, the bases for tools and material selection during

therapy, history taking, critical incidence analysis and etc. It also covers the scope of

practice of the audiologists and the speech pathologist, assessment, intervention,

management procedures for speech science cases, as well as observation skill. This course

will be conducted via lectures, tutorials, and clinical observation sessions. Students are

assessed through assignment, presentation, observation report, and final examination.


1. Goldberg, S. A., Clinical skills for speech-language pathologist. New York:

Delmar Cengage Learning, 1997.

2. Flasher, L. V, & Fogel, P. T., Counseling skills for speech-language pathologist

and audiologist, Albany: Thompson Delmar Learning, 2004.

3. Gillam, R. B., Marquardt, T. P., & Martin, F. N., Communication sciences and

disorders: From science to clinical practice. San Diego: Singular Publishing

Group, 2010.

4. Hedge, M. N., & Davis, D., Clinical method and practicum in speech-language

pathology, Clifton Park, New York: Thompson Delmar Learning, 2005.

GTP111 Applied Linguistic for Speech Pathology

This course is an advanced course on linguistics introduces earlier. It covers on the

application aspects of linguistics related to communication disorders, especially in the

context of multicultural society as Malaysia. The topics focus on the acquisition of the

second and third languages, colloquial language, dialects, and their effects on the

management of communication disorders cases.


1. Schmidt, N., Applied Linguistic (2nd Ed.), Hodder Education Pub., United

Kingdom, 2010.

2. Cook, G., Applied Linguistics (Oxford Introduction to Language Study Series),

Oxford University Press. USA, 2003.

3. Ellis, R. & Widdowson, H. G., Second Language Acquisition (Oxford

Introduction to Language Study Series), Oxford University Press, USA, 1997.

4. Davies, A. & Elder, C., The Handbook of Applied Linguistic, Blackwell

Publishing Ltd., USA, 2006.

92

GTS101 Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science

This course introduces students to the general knowledge in the field of exercise and sport

science. It also introduces students to the application of exercise and sport science in

facilitating athletes and improving fitness and health of individual. This course will be

conducted via lectures and practical sessions. Students will be assessed through

assignment, test and final examination.


1. Griffin, M., Watkins P., Wilkinson, N., Sport and Exercise Science: An

Introduction, Routledge, 2015.

2. Lumpkin, A., Introduction to Physical Education (9th Ed.), Humanities and Social

Sciences, 2013.

3. Massengale, J. H. and Swanson, R. A. (eds.), The History of Exercise and Sport

Science, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2013.

4. William Hardin Freeman, W. D., Physical Education and Sports in a Changing

Society, Allyn & Bacon, 2001.

GTS102 Sociology and Philosophy of Sports

This course introduces students to the basic sociological and philosophical concepts related

to sport. It also discusses the sociological and philosophical implications of ancient and

modern developments. This course will be conducted through lectures and discussions.

Students will be assessed through test, assignments and final examination.


1. Karen, D. & Washington, R., Sociology Perspectives on Sport: The Games

Outside the Games, Routledge, 2015

2. Morgan, W., Meier, K. and Schneider, A., Ethics in Sport, Champaign, IL: Human

Kinetics, 2013.

GTS103 Exercise Physiology and Anatomy of Movement

This course introduces students to basic anatomy and physiology of sports. It covers the

topics on skeletal muscle, nervous system, gastrointestinal system, endocrine system,

reproductive system, cardiovascular system, respiratory system, and renal system. This

course will be conducted via lectures, practical and discussions. The students will be

assessed through quiz, practical tests, assignments, practical report, presentations and final

examination.


1. Netter, F. H. Atlas of Human Anatomy, 6th edition. CIBA – GEIGY. 2014.

2. Guyton, A.C. & Hall, I.E. Textbook of Medical Physiology, 13th edition. Elsevier:

Saunders. 2016.

3. Standring, S. Gray's anatomy - The Anatomical Basis of Clinical Practice, 41st

edition. Churchill Livingstone. 2015.

4. Fox, S. Human Physiology, 14th ed., McGraw-Hill Science. 2015.

GTS104 Exercise Physiology

93

This course introduces students on the concepts and theories of physiological in exercise

and sports. It also introduces students to the practical in measuring the physiological fitness

of individual. This course will be conducted via lectures and practical. Students will be

assessed through test, practical reports and final examination.


1. John, P.P., Cedric, X. B., Exercise Physiology, FA Davis, 2015.

2. Powers, S., Howley, E., Exercise Physiology: Theory and Application to Fitness

and Performance (9th Ed.), McGraw Hill, 2015.

3. Wilmore, J. H, Costill, D. L, Kenney, W.L., Physiology of Sport and Exercise,

Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2015.

4. McArdle, W.D, Katch, F.l, Katch, V.L., Exercise Physiology: Energy, Nutrition,

and Human Performance (8th Ed.), Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins, 2014.

5. Astrand P.O. and Rodahl, K. Textbook of Work Physiology, Champaign, IL:

Human Kinetics, 2003.

GTS105 Sports Psychology

This course introduces students to the theories and concept in sports psychology field. It

also covers the skills and strategy to enhance athlete’s mental and emotional. This course

will be conducted via lectures, discussions and practical. Students will be assessed through

test, practical reports, presentations and final examination.


1. Cox, R., Sport Psychology: Concepts and Applications (7th Ed.), Columbus, OH:

McGraw-Hill, 2012.

2. Tenenbaum, G., Eklund, R.C., Kamata, A., Measurement in Sport and Exercise

Psychology, Human Kinetics, 2012.

3. Weinberg, R. & Gould, D., Foundations of Sport and Exercise Psychology (2nd

Ed.), Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2000.

GTX104 Introduction to Medical Radiation

This course introduces students to the fundamental of electromagnetic radiation (EMR)

and its applications in health and medicine. EMR includes the ionising radiation (gamma

ray and X-ray) and non-ionising radiation (ultraviolet, visible light, infrared, microwave

and radiofrequency). This course provides knowledge regarding the modern concept of

atom, radioactivity, classification, radiation source, production and properties of radiation

as well as their effects on biological tissues. The innovative and safety in applications of

ionising and non-ionising radiation for diagnostic and therapeutic purposes will be

discussed. The course will be conducted via lectures and group discussion. The students

will be assessed through test, assignment, presentation and final examination.


1. Ervin B. Podgoršak, Radiation Physics for Medical Physicists (3rd Ed.), Springer,

2016.

2. Pandit B. Vidyasagar, Sagar S. Jagtap and Omprakash Yemul, Radiation in

Medicine and Biology (1st Ed.), Pan Stanford, 2017.

3. Robert Splinter, Handbook of Physics in Medicine and Biology, CRC Press, 2010.

94

4. B.B. Lahiri et al., Medical Application of Infrared Thermography: A Review,

Infrared Physics & Technology, Vol. 55, 2012.

5. Jean Krutmann et al., Dermatological Phototherapy and Photodiagnostic

Methods, Springer, 2009.

GTX105 Medical Radiation Physics I

This course combines several topics from various scope of physics education that are

relevant to medical radiation programme. Students will be introduced to the 1) basic of

measurement and vectors, 2) some topics in classical physics (Newtonian mechanics) that

are motion along a straight line, motion in 2-, and 3-dimensions, force and motion, kinetic

energy and work, as well as potential energy and conservation of energy, 3) some topics in

physics of vibration, waves and optics that are waves motion, sound waves, and light waves

(interference and diffraction), 4) some topics in quantum mechanics that are photon and

matter waves, and 5) a topic in solid state physics that is conduction of electricity in solids.

Students will also be exposed briefly to the recent advancements related to the topics such

as photoacoustic imaging, Doppler ultrasound, applications of diffraction grating in UV-

VIS spectroscopy and phase-contrast imaging, optical coherence tomography, Cherenkov

luminescence imaging, optically stimulated luminescence (OSL), and the application of

photonics devices for radiation monitoring. The course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials, and group discussion. The students will be assessed through tests, assignment,

presentation of tutorial and assignment, as well as final examination.


1. Jearl Walker, Halliday and Resnick, Fundamental of Physics (10th Ed.), Wiley,

2014.

2. Frederick Bueche and Eugene Hecht, Schaum's Outline of College Physics (11th

Ed.), McGrawHill Education, 2012.

3. Martin Zinke-Almang, Physics for Life Sciences, NelsonEducation Ltd., 2009.

4. Robert Splinter, Handbook of Physics in Medicine and Biology, CRC Press, 2010.

GTX106 Mathematics of Radiation Science I

This course discusses advanced mathematics and calculus. It will focus on function and

graph, calculus, differentiation, differentiation techniques and applications, integration,

integration techniques and applications, vector, matrices, linear equation system, analytical

geometry and complex numbers.


1. Lay, D. C., Linear Algebra and Its Application (4th Ed.), Pearson Higher

Education, 2011.

2. Larson, R., Hostetler, R. and Edwards, B.H., Calculus with Analytic Geometry:

Multivariable Calculus (7th Ed.), Houghton Mifflin Company College Division,

2002.

95

3. Anton, H., Calculus, Combined, Student Resource (6th Ed.), John Wiley and Sons,

1998.

GTX107 Mathematics of Radiation Science II

This course introduces ordinary differential equations (ODE) of first and second orders,

methods of solutions that include Laplace transform and series solution. It also introduces

Fourier series and method of separation of variable for the partial differential equation

(PDE). Simple applications related to real situation such as vibrating spring will be

introduced.


1. William F. Trench. Elementary Differential Equation with Boundary Value

Problems, Brooks/Cole Thomson Learing. 2013.

2. Dennis G. Zill & Micheal R. Cullen. Differential Equation with Boundary-Value

Problems (7th Ed.), Brooks/Cole, Cengage Learning. 2009.

3. Haberman, Richard. Applied Partial Differntial Equation with Fourier Series and

Boundary Value Problems (5th Ed.), Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Education,

2012.

96


GTA203 Advanced Audiology Techniques

This course introduces students to the auditory lesion, pure tone audiometry clinical

masking, high frequency tympanometry, acoustic reflex and speech audiometry. It also

covers the introduction to the results integration of the mentioned tests, non-organic

hearing loss (NOHL) and the site of lesion tests. This course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials, practical and problem-based learning. Students will be assessed through test,

assignment, practical report and final examination.


1. Gelfand, S. A., Essentials of Audiology, United States of America: Thieme, 2009.

2. Katz, J., Medwetsky, L., Burkard, R., & Hood, L. (Eds.), Handbook of Clinical

Audiology, United States of America: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.

3. Kramer, S., & Guthrie, L., Audiology Workbook, San Diego: Plural Publishing

Inc., 2008.

4. Roeser, R. J., Valente, M., & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology Diagnosis, United

States of America: Thieme, 2007.

5. Hunter, L., & Shahnaz, N., Acoustic Immittance Measures Basic and Advanced

Practice, San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2012.

GTA205 Neurology for Hearing and Speech

This course introduces students to basic principles of neurology, central nervous system

and peripheral system related to hearing and speech. It also covers the related neurological

diseases, basic clinical examinations and the management of patient. This course will be

conducted via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions. Students will be assessed through

tests, presentation, practical reports and final examination.


1. Berlin, C. I. (ed.), Neurotransmission and Hearing Loss: Basic Science, Diagnosis,

and Management, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1997.

2. Musiek, F. E., Baran, J. A., and Pinheiro, M. L., Neuroaudiology: Case studies.

San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1994.

3. Berlin, C. I., The Brain and Sensory Plasticity: Language Acquisition and Hearing,

San Diego: Singular Pub-lishing Group, Inc., 2003.

4. Ray, J., Review of Neurology - A Workbook for Speech and Hearing Students.

St. Louis: Mosby-Year Book, Inc., 2003.

5. Mohamed Hamid, Aristides Sismanis, Medical otology and neurotology: A

clinical guide to auditory and vestibular disorders New York: Thieme, 2006.

GTA208 Pediatric Audiology

This course introduces students to the importance of listening, medical evaluation and

management, hearing test protocols, rehabilitation and education management of children

with hearing loss. It also includes acoustic speech signal and speech perception assessment

of infants and children as well as hearing tests such as Behavioural Observation

Audiometry (BOA), Visual Reinforcement Audiometry (VRA) and Play Audiometry are

also emphasised. This course will be conducted through lectures, tutorials, practical and

97

case study. Students will be assessed through test, assignment, presentation and final

examination.


1. Madell, J. R., &Flexer, C. (Eds.), Pediatric Audiology: Diagnosis, Technology

and Management (2nd Ed.), New York: Thieme, 2014.

2. Madell, J. R., &Flexer, C. (Eds.), Pediatric Audiology Casebook, New York:

Thieme, 2011.

3. Northern, J. L., & Downs, M. P., Hearing in Children (5th Ed.), San Diego: Plural

Publishing Inc., 2002.

4. Smaldino, J.J., &Flexer, C. (Eds.), Handbook of acoustic accessibility: Best

practices for listening, learning and literacy in the classroom. New York: Thieme,

2012.

GTA209 Audiology Clinic I

This course introduces students to the audiology clinical practice. It includes preparation

of the students to the clinic and clinical practicum. Students will be taught about clinical

communication, advanced audiology technique, reflective practice and review of the

audiology tests and its integration during the first half of the semester. In the second half

of the semester, students will be supervised by experienced audiologist on weekly basis.

Students are expected to observe the clinical session and conduct tests on cooperative

patients. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials, problem-based learning

(PBL) and practical sessions. Students will be assessed through practical report, test, report

(reflective journal), logbook and final examination. In order to pass this course, each

student must pass the coursework components and final examinations (written exam and

Objective Structured Clinical Examination, OSCE) with at least grade C+.


1. Katz, J. (Ed.), Handbook of Clinical Audiology (7th Ed.), Philadelphia, USA:

Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2015.

2. Taylor, B., Reflective Practice for Health Care Professionals: A Practical Guide

(3rd Ed.), Open University Press, 2010.

3. Stach, B. A., Clinical Audiology: An Introduction (2nd Ed.), Singular Publishing,

2010.

4. Goldfarb, R., &Serpanos, Y. C., Professional Writing in Speech-language

Pathology and Audiology Workbook, San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2011.

GTA210 Otology

This course introduces students to principles of clinical otology, pathologies related to

hearing and balance system, otological and audiological examinations, other disorders

related ear, nose and throat as well basic management of patients with otological disorders.

It also covers the relationship between ear pathologies and otological and audiological test

results. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions. Students

will be assessed through test, presentation, practical report and final examination.


98

1. Browning, G. G., Clinical Otology and Audiology (2nd Ed.), Oxford: Butterworth

Heinemann, 1998.

2. Berlin, C. I., and Keats, B. J. B., Genetics and Hearing Loss, San Diego: Singular

Publishing Group, Inc., 2000.

3. Canalis, R. F. (ed.), and Lambert, P. R. H. (ed.), Ear: Comprehensive Otology,

Maryland: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2000.

4. Rockeinstein, M. J., Comprehensive Review of Otolaryngology, Philadephia:

Elsevier, Inc., 2004.

GTA211 Hearing Screening

This course introduces students to the concepts of hearing screening including its principle,

objectives and methods of screening tests of all stages of life. It also covers the sensitivity

and specificity, advantages and disadvantages of various hearing screening tests. This

course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions. Students will be

assessed through test, presentation, practical report and final examination.


1. Hall, J. W., New Handbook of Auditory Evoked Responses, Boston: Pearson,

2007.

2. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., &Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical

Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.

3. Seewald, R., & Tharpe, A. M., Comprehensive Handbook of Pediatric Audiology,

San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2010.

4. Madell, J. R., &Flexer, C. (Eds.), Pediatric Audiology: Diagnosis, Technology,

and Management, United States of America: Thieme, 2008.

GTA212 Basic Hearing Amplification Technology

This course introduces students to the concepts, types, components, system, prescription

and electroacoustic measurement of hearing aids, and earmolds, ear shells, and coupling

systems. It also covers the importance of bilateral fitting, patient education and counselling

for hearing aids wearers. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and practical.

Students will be assessed through test, assignment, practical report and final examination.


1. Dillon, H., Hearing Aids (2nd Ed.), Hong Kong: Thieme, 2012.

2. Ricketts, T., Bentler, R., & Mueller, H. G. (Eds.), Modern Hearing Aids Function,

Features, and Advanced Algorithms, San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2014.

3. Mueller, H. G., Ricketts, T., &Bentler, R. (Eds.), Modern Hearing Aids Pre-

Fitting Testing and Selection Considerations, San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc.,

2012.

4. Bentler, R., Mueller, H. G., & Todd Ricketts (Eds.), Modern Hearing Aids

Verification, Outcome Measures, and Follow-Up, San Diego: Plural Publishing

Inc., 2013.

GTA213 Electrophysiological Tests

This course introduces students to different types of electrophysiological tests, basic test

parameters, procedures to perform the tests and factors that can affect the

99

electrophysiological test results. It also covers the relationship between the test results and

ear pathologies. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions.

Students will be assessed through test, presentation, practical report and final examination.


1. Hall, J. W., New Handbook of Auditory Evoked Responses, Boston, Mass:

Pearson, 2007.

2. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical


GTB204 Molecular Biology Techniques

This course introduces students to the basic principles of molecular biology for prokaryote

and eukaryotes. Fundamental of molecular genetics, chemical bonding, microbial genetics,

modification enzymes, digestion enzyme, cloning vehicle, genes manipulation technology,

molecular cloning, protein/gene sequencing, PCR and post-PCR technique, microarray,

proteins interaction, Western/Northern/Far-Western analysis, protein-DNA interaction,

yeast two hybrid system, transgenic technology and the controversial CRISPR technology

will be discussed. Practical skills will be enhanced through the exposure to gene libraries

constructions, SDS-PAGE and proteomics as well as bioinformatics assignment via

cloning simulation project. The course will be conducted via lectures, discussion and

practical sessions. The students will be assessed through assignment, practical session,

practical test (OSPE), test and final examination.


1. J. D. Watson and S. P Bell, Molecular Biology of the Gene (7th Ed.), San

Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings, 2014.

2. J. W. Dale, and S. F. Park, Molecular Genetics of Bacteria (5th Ed.), West Sussex:

John Wiley and Sons, 2010.

3. S. B. Primrose and R. M. Twyman, Principles of Gene Manipulation and

genomics (7th Ed.), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications, 2006.

4. J. Sambrook, E.F. Fritsch, T. Maniatis, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual.

(4th Ed.), Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory. (2012).

GTB218 Immunology II

This course introduces students to advanced concepts in immunology including the

involvement of immunological mechanisms in various diseases such as autoimmune

diseases, immunodeficiency, HIV infection, transplantation and tumour immunology. It

also covers the principles and immunological methods such as immunoprecipitation and

agglutination reactions, ELISA, immunofluorescence, immunoenzymatic staining and

flow cytometry as well as the production and use of monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies.

The course will be conducted via lecture, practical and discussion. The students will be

assessed through tests, OSPE, assignments, presentation and final examination.


1. Abbas A.K. and Lichtman A.H., Basic Immunology, Saunders Elsevier, 2006.

2. Delves P., Martin S., Burton D. and Roitt I. Roitt’s Essential Immunology,

Blackwell Publishing., 2006.

100

3. Janeway, C.A., Travers, P., Walport, M. and Shlomchik, M. Immunobiology: The

immune system in health and disease (6th Ed.). Garland Science Publishing, New

York, 2005.

4. Kuby, J., Kindt, T.J., Osborne, B.A. and Goldsby, R.A. Immunology (6th Ed.).

W.H. Freeman & Co, 2006.

5. Levinson, W. and Jawetz E. Medical Microbiology & Immunology (6th Ed.),

McGraw Hill, 2000.

GTB219 Pharmacology I

This course introduces students to basic knowledge and principles of pharmacology, uses

and effects of drugs to human health and quality of life. It covers fundamental aspects such

as pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, cellular pharmacology, biochemistry,

physiology, quantitative pharmacology and systemic pharmacology (autonomic and

central nervous system, cardiovascular, respiratory, gastrointestinal, endocrine,

antimicrobials and anti-inflammatory). This course will be conducted via lectures and

practical sessions. Students’ knowledge will be assessed through tests, assignments,

practical reports, and final examination.


1. Tripathy, K.D., Essentials of Medical Pharmacology (7th Ed.), New Delhi: Jaypee

Brothers, 2013.

2. Harvey, R.A., Clark, M.A., Finkel, R., Ray, J.A. and Whalen, K., Lippincott’s

Illustrated Reviews (5th Ed.), Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2011.

3. Katzung, B.G., Masters, S.B. and Trevor, A.J., Basic and Clinical Pharmacology

(12 th Ed.), New York: McGraw-Hill Professional Publishing, 2012.

4. Hitner, H. and Nagle, B.T., Pharmacology: An introduction (6th Ed.), New York:

McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2011.

5. Rang, H.P., Ritter, J.M. Flower, R.J. and Henderson, G., Rang & Dale’s

Pharmacology (7th Ed.), Philadelphia: Churchill Livingstone, 2011.

GTB221 Basic Hematology

This course introduces students to the concept and knowledge of basic principles in

hematology. It covers the structure and function of blood cells, haematopoiesis,

introduction to anaemia and haemostasis. The course will be conducted via lectures,

practical and presentations. Students’ knowledge will be assessed through tests, practical

report, presentations, practical skills (SPOT/OSPE) and final examination.


1. Bain B.J, Bates I, Laffan M. A. and Lewis S.M., Dacie and Lewis Practical

Haematology (11th Ed.) Churchill Livingstone Elservier, 2012.

2. Harmening D.M. Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostasis, 5th.

Edition, F.A. Davis Company, 2009

3. Hoffbrand A.V., Catovsky D., Tuddenham E.G.D, and Green A. R., Postgraduate

Haematology (6th Ed.), Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.

4. Hoffbrand, A.V. and Moss P.A.H., Essential Haematology (6th Ed.), Wiley-

Blackwell, 2011.

101

5. Moore, G., Knight, G. and Blann, A. Haematology (Fundamentals of Biomedical

Science), Oxford University Press, 2010

GTB222 Pathology

This course introduces students to the scope and history of pathology, organisation and

nomenclature used in pathology, types and basic mechanisms of cell injuries,

inflammation, haemodynamic disturbances, neoplasia, as well as diagnostic tests

conducted in the pathology laboratory such as histopathology, cytology, enzyme

histochemistry and immunohistochemistry. Students will be provided with practical

demonstration on tissue fixation, processing, microtomy, staining and museum techniques.

This course will be conducted through lectures, tutorials, practical and discussions. The

students will be assessed through presentation, tests, assignment, laboratory reports and

final examination.


1. Robbins and Cotran, Pathologic Basis of Disease (8th Ed.), Elsevier, 2010.

2. Kumar V., Abbas, A.K., Aster, J.C., Robbins Basic Pathology (9th Ed.), Elsevier,

2013.

3. Underwood, J.C.E. and Cross S.S., General and Systemic Pathology (5th Ed.),

Churchill Livingstone, 2004.

4. Young B and Heath J.W., Wheater’s Functional Histology (5th Ed.),


5. Kent, T., Hart M., Introduction to Human Disease (4th Ed.), Appleton & Lange,

1998.

GTB224 Immunology I

This course introduces the fundamental knowledge of immunology including immunity

and immune response. It covers the types of lymphoid tissues and cells, the characteristics,

types and functions of various molecules such as immunoglobulins, cytokines and the

various components of the complement system as well as immune cells such as B and T

lymphocytes. The concepts of antigen, antigenicity and immunogenicity, the importance

of vaccination (immunisation) and its impact on human health as well as the basic concept

of immunopathology and the use of antigen-antibody interactions in research and diagnosis

will also be discussed. The course will be conducted via lecture, seminar and discussion.

Students will be assessed through presentation, discussion, tests, assignments, and final

examination.


1. Abbas A.K. and Lichtman A.H. Basic Immunology, Saunders Elsevier, 2006.

2. Delves P., Martin S., Burton D. and Roitt I., Roitt’s Essential Immunology

(Essential), Blackwell Publishing, 2006.

3. Janeway, C.A., Travers, P., Walport, M. and Shlomchik, M. Immunobiology: The

immune system in health and disease (6th Ed.), Garland Science Publishing, New

York, 2005.

4. Kuby, J., Kindt, T.J., Osborne, B.A. and Goldsby, R.A. Immunology (6th Ed.),

W.H. Freeman & Co, 2006.

102

GTB225 Epidemiology

This course aims to provide students with a comprehensive introduction to the principles

and methods of epidemiology which covers the causes of disease and the way

epidemiology can be used for the prevention of disease. It also covers health promotion,

including environmental and occupational health. This course will be conducted through

lectures and tutorials. Students will be assessed through assignment, quiz, tests and final

examination.


1. Gordis, L., Epidmiology (4th Ed.), Saunders Elsevier, 2009.

2. Raj Bhopal, Concepts of epidemiology (2nd Ed.), Oxford University Press, 2008.

3. Ray M. Merrill. Introduction to Epidemiology (6th Ed.), Jones & Bartlett

Learning, 2013.

4. Robert H. Friis and Thomas A. Sellers, Epidemiology for public health practice

(5th Ed.), Jones & Bartlett Learning, 2014.

5. Webb, P. and Bain, C. Essential epidemiology: an introduction for students and

health professionals (2nd Ed.), Cambridge University Press, 2011.

GTB226 Cell Biology Techniques

This course introduces students to fundamental knowledge in cell biology and cell culture

techniques. It covers the skills and instrumentations related to somatic cell, cancer cell and

stem cell culture which can be applied in cell biology related research. The course will be

conducted via lecture and practical. The students will be assessed through tests,

assignments, practical reports and final examination.


1. Gerald K., Cell and molecular biology: Concepts and experiments (3rd Ed.), John

Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2004.

2. Kaushik D., Stem cell technologies: Basics and applications, New York:

McGraw-Hill, 2010.

3. M. Butler, Animal Cell Culture and Technology (2nd Ed,), London and New York:

BIOS Scientific Publishers, 2004.

4. Robert Lanza et al., Essentials of stem cells biology, Amsterdam: Elsevier

Academic, 2006.

GTD213 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I

This course enables the students to understand the need to modify the normal diet to

therapeutic diet in terms of nutrient composition, texture and food presentation according

to disease conditions. Students will learn about the principle of medical nutrition therapy

of weight managment, endocrine, cardiovascular and gastrointestinal diseases, and food

allergy and intolerance. Each topic will discuss about the theoretical and practical aspects

of the medical nutrition therapy that has to be given to the patients with various diseases.

Students will be assessed through test, assignment, presentation and final examination.


1. Mahan, L.K. et al., Krause’s Food, Nutrition & Diet Therapy (14th Ed.), Saunders

Co., 2017.

103

2. Shaw, V., Clinical Paediatric Dietetics (4th Ed.), John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2015.

3. Whitney, W., Understanding Normal & Clinical Nutrition (11th Ed.), Australia,

Wadsworth, 2017

4. Nelms, M.H., Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study Approach (5th Ed),

Thomson Wadsworth, 2016

GTD214 Dietetics Counselling and Communication

This course introduces the students to the field of dietetics and career in dietetics. The

important roles of dietitian including the counselling skills, dietetics counselling and

interviewing techniques will be exposed to the students. The course will also emphasise on

the aspects of Nutrition Care Process (NCP), successful nutritional education intervention,

ethics in dietetics field and patient educational tools.


1. Bauer, K.D & Liou, D., Nutrition Counseling and Education Skill Development,

Wadsworth Publisher Co., 2016.

2. Mahan, L.K. et al., Krause’s Food, Nutrition & Diet Therapy (14th Ed.), Saunders

Co., 2017.

3. Snetselaar, L., Nutrition Counseling Skills for The Nutrition Care process (4th Ed.),


GTF200 Criminalistics

This course introduces students to basic elements of forensic science, including various

physical evidence as well as the collection and preservation from crime scenes. Impression

evidence--finger prints, ear and lip prints, foot prints, tool marks, and tyre prints-- used in

identification of individuals and objects will be taught. A brief account on trace evidence

materials such as dust, glass, soil, fibres and hairs too is included. Introductory topics on

biological evidence, firearm identification, explosives, and questioned documents also

form part of the syllabus. The students also learn principles of photographic techniques,

digital cameras, microscopy, and uses of invisible radiation (UV, IR and X-rays) in crime

detection. This course will be conducted via lectures, practical and other face-to-face

learning. Students will be assessed through tests, assignments, practical reports, quiz and

final examination.


1. Houck M.M. & Siegel J.A., Fundamentals of Forensic Science (2nd Ed.),

Academic Press, 2010.

2. Stuart H. James and Jon J. Nordby, Forensic Science, An Introduction to

Scientific and Investigative Techniques (3rd. Ed.), CRC Press, 2009.

3. Bertino, A.J., Forensic Science: Fundamentals and Investigations, Cengage

Learning., 2008.

4. Kaye B.H., Science and the Detective, VCH, New York, Wiley, 1995.

GTF204 Forensic Psychology

This course introduces students to behavioural aspects and human cognitive in crime from

the perspectives of perpetrators and victims. Discussions will be concentrated on

multifarious forms of crimes, juvenile issues, and adult criminals. The role of forensic

psychologists, connections between psychology and law, the use of psychological

measurements, treatment and rehabilitation will also be discussed. This course will be

104

conducted via lectures and discussion. Students will be assessed through test, assignments,

seminar and final examination.


1. Matthew, T.H., Forensic Psychology (2nd Ed.), John Wiley & Sons, 2013.

2. Davies, G.M. & Beech, A.R., Forenic Psychology: Crime, Justice, Law,

Intervetions (2nd Ed.). John Wiley & Sons, 2012.

3. Turvey B., Criminal Profiling - An Introduction to Behavioral Evidence Analysis.

Academic Press, London, 2002.

GTF210 Material Chemistry

This course introduces students to the characteristics of materials, processing and the uses

of metals, alloys, polymers, ceramics and composites. It also covers the importance of

material chemistry daily life and forensic application. This course will be conducted via

lectures, tutorials and discussion. Students will be assessed through tests, discussion,

project proposal, assignment and final examination.


1. Callister W.D., Material Science and Engineering: An Introduction (8th Ed.), USA:

John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2010.

2. Allcock H.R., Introduction to Materials Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, USA,

2008.

3. Fahlman B.D., Materials Chemistry (2nd Ed.), New York: Springer, 2011.

4. Lewis P.R., Reynolds K. and Gagg C., Forensic Materials Engineering.

Washington DC: CRC Press, 2004.

5. Temenoff J.S. & Mikos A.G., Biomaterials: The Intersection of Biology and

Material Science, Pearson International Edition, 2008.

GTF214 Pollution and Environmental Chemistry

This course introduces student regarding pollutant agents and environment which covers

introduction to component of environment as general, environmental quality act and water

quality standard, nutrient and eutrophication, heavy metals, dissolved oxygen (DO)

biology oxygen demand (BOD), chemical oxygen demand (COD), meteorology of air

pollution, concept of water pollution, water and air chemical pollutants, distribution of air

pollutant and environmental forensics. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials

and discussion. Students will be assessed through tests, assignments, reports, presentation

and final examination.


1. Roy, M.H., Principles of Environmental Chemistry. Cambridge, UK: RSC

Publishing, 2007.

2. Suzanna, M. I., Environmental Law in Malaysia. Bangi: Penerbit UKM, 2006.

3. Daniel, B.B & Edward, A.K., Environmental Science: Earth as a Living Planet.

USA: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2005.

105

4. William, P.C. and Barbara, W.S., Environmental Science: A Global Concern.

USA: McGraw Hill, 1997.

GTF216 Analytical Chemistry III

This course introduces students to the principles and various spectrochemistry techniques

including optical spectrometry, molecular absorption spectrometry, molecular

fluorescence spectroscopy, atomic spectroscopy, infra-red spectroscopy and nuclear

magnetic resonance spectroscopy. This course will be conducted via lectures, discussion,

PBL and practical. Students will also perform mini project related to analytical chemistry

using the analytical techniques which have been taught. Students will be assessed through

tests, practical reports, project and final examination.


1. Hoffmann, E., Mass Spectrometry: Principles and Applications (3rd Ed.), West

Sussex: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2007.

2. Niessen, W.M., Liquid Chromatography--Mass Spectrometry (3rd Ed.), Boca

Raton: CRC/Taylor & Francis, 2006.

3. Aguilar, M., Solvent Extraction and Liquid Membranes. New York: Marcel

Dekker, 2004.

4. Welz, B., Atomic Absorption Spectrometry (3rd Ed.). Weinheim: Wiley-VCH,

1999.

GTF217 Organic Chemistry II

This course introduces students to the structure, physical properties and chemical reactions

for organic compounds including alcohol and phenol, ether, epoxide and sulfide,

conjugated compounds, aromatic compounds, ketone and aldehyde. The course will be

conducted via lectures, tutorial, discussion, PBL and practical. Students will be assessed



1. Wade. Jr. L.G., Organic Chemsitry (8th Ed.), Pearson Prentice Hall, USA 2013.

2. Solomons T.W.G. & Fryhle C.B., Organic Chemistry (10th Ed.), John Wiley &

Sons, Inc., 2011.

3. Smith J.G., Organic Chemistry (3rd Ed.), McGraw-Hill, 2011.

GTF218 Organic Chemistry III

This course introduces students to the structure, physical properties and chemical reactions

for organic compounds including amine, carboxylic acid, carboxylic acid derivatives,

carbonyl compounds, carbohydrate and nucleic acid, lipid and fat, as well as peptide, amino

acid and protein. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorial, discussion, PBL and

practical. Students will be assessed through test, assignment, practical reports, quiz and

final examination.


1. Wade. Jr. L.G., Organic Chemsitry (8th Ed.), Pearson Prentice Hall, USA 2013.

2. Solomons T.W.G. & Fryhle C.B., Organic Chemistry (10th Ed.), John Wiley &

Sons, Inc., 2011.

3. Smith J.G., Organic Chemistry (3rd Ed.), McGraw-Hill, 2011.

106

GTF219 Physical Evidence

This course introduces students to characterisation of different kinds of physical evidence

using physicochemical properties. The evidences include: paint, glass, soil, fibres, and

lamp filaments. Comparison microscopy for examination of physical evidence,

experimental techniques for the restoration of erased numbers on different metal surfaces,

and investigations related to cybercrime form part of the curriculum. Introduction to the

use of lasers and electron microscopy in the examination of physical evidence of materials;

and specialized photographic techniques including macrophotography, photomicrography

and invisible radiation photography are also included. This course will be conducted via

lectures, practical and discussion. Students will be assessed through tests, assignments,

practical reports, practical test and final examination.


1. James, S.H. & Nordby, J.J., Forensic Science: An Introduction to Scientific and

Investigative Techniques (3rd Ed.), CRC Press, 2009.

2. Jackson, A.R.W. & Jackson, J.M., Forensic Science (2nd Ed.), Pearson, Prentice

Hall, 2008.

3. Baker, J.S., Fricke, L.B., Baker, K.S. & Aycock T.L., Lamp Examination for ON

or OFF in Traffic Collisions. IL: North Western University Centre for Public

Safety, 2003.

4. Bertino, A.J., Forensic Science: Fundamentals and Investigations. Cengage

Learning, 2008.

GTF220 Forensic Serology

This course introduces students to the concept of antigens and antibodies and various

blood-proteins and enzymes present in the blood and body fluid. It also provides practical

knowledge to group the body fluids from crime scenes, to identify and individualise the

samples as well as the HLA system and its application to identify individuals. The course

also covers the methods in identification of patterns and effects of blood value as evidence.

This course will be conducted via lecture, practical and PBL. Students will be assessed

through test, presentation, practical reports, practical test and final examination.


1. Bidwell, J.L., Navarrete, C. & Bodmer, W.F., Histocompatibility Testing.

Imperial College Press, 2000.

2. Saferstein, R., Forensic Science Handbook, Vol. II and III. New Jersey:

Regents/Prentice HalL, 1993.

3. Issitt, P.D., Applied Blood Group Serology (3rd Ed.), Montgomery Scientific

Publication, 1985.

GTK205 Supply and Quality of Drinking Water

This course introduces students to matters related to supply and quality of drinking water.

Source of water supply, water, water supply and quality issues, water treatment and water

sampling will be discussed. In addition, the descriptions of water pollution, category and

classification of water pollution, as well as water quality impacts are also highlighted.

Students will learn the process of physical and chemical processes that react in the water

107

as well as change process of in the context of human impact on water quality. The concept

of supply management and water quality will also be discussed.


1. World Health Organization. Guidelines for Drinking Water (6th Ed.), American

Water Works Association, New York. 2006

2. James Edzwald. Water Quality & Treatment: A Handbook of Drinking Water,

(6th Ed.), American Water Works. New York. 2006.

3. Harry E. Hickey. Water Supply Systems and Evaluation Methods. Volume 1:

Water Supply Concepts. University of Maryland. Michingan. 2008.

GTK206 Industrial Hygiene

This course introduces the important principles and concepts of industrial hygiene; in

anticipation, recognition and evaluation of the levels of contaminants in workplace settings,

for control and prevention of ill health. Students will have hands-on fieldwork hygiene

assessment of workplace exposure hazards such as dust and particulate matter, chemical,

noise, microbiological, heat stress, indoor air quality monitoring, sampling methods,

sample transportation and storage as well as analysis using analytical instruments. Suitable

control and prevention measures of multiple health problems that may occur among

workers who are constantly exposed to unhealthy environments in the workplace will be

discussed. These will further contribute towards maintaining the sustainability of the health

and safety of workers and the public, support sustainable development and increase

productivity. The course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and practical and field

work based learning. Students will be assessed through assignment, hygiene reports,

presentation, seminar paper/seminar, tests and final examination.


1. Nims, D. Basic of Industrial Hygiene. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Canada. 1999.

GTK207 Food Hygiene and Safety

This course emphasises on knowledge and skills needed to protect the health of public on

food safety and hygiene. It includes an introduction to activities of food safety and quality,

matters related to foodborne illness, hazard in food processing, personal hygiene and

regional food supply, procedures for food handling, prevention of food contamination and

food legislations in Malaysia. Guidelines related to food safety and quality as well as food

safety management tools such as such Good Hygiene Practice (GHP), Good Manufacturing

Practice (GMP), risk assessment and Hazard Analysis Critical Control Points system

(HACCP) as well as food borne disease investigation will be discussed. The course will be

conducted via lecture, practical and fieldwork. Students will be assessed through

assignments, reports, discussion, tests and final examination.


1. Meggitt, C., Food Hygiene and Safety, Oxford: Heinemann Education Publishers,

2003.

2. Alli, I., Food Quality Assurance: Principles and Practices. Boca Raton: CRC

Press, 2004.

3. McSwane, D., Rue, N. R., Linton, R. & Williams, A. G. Essentials of Food Safety

and Sanitation (5th Ed.), USA: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2007

108

4. Marriott, N. G. & Gravani, R. B. Principles of Food Sanitation (5th Ed.), New

York: Springer, 2006.

5. Schmadi, R.E and Redrick, G.E., Food Safety Handbook, Wiley-Interscience.

New Jersey, 2003.

GTK208 Solid Waste Management

This course introduces students to waste classification and characteristics of distinction. It

also covers legal requirements in relation to the disposal of solid waste and radioactive

waste scheduled. Analytical techniques and methods of waste handling, method of

labelling, packaging, storage, transport, waste disposal, and the safety aspects of handling

waste. This course is delivered through lectures and others face to face learning. Students

are assessed thorough assignments, quizzes, tests, mini project, study visit and final

examination.


1. Isa, B., Johan P. & Christine F., Solid Waste Management and Recycling: Actors,

Partnership & Policies in Hyderabad, India & Nairobi, Academic Publishers,

2004.

2. Hester, R.E. & Harisson, R.M., Environmental Health Impact of Solid Waste

Management Activities, Cambridge: Royal Society of Chemistry, 2002.

3. Cheremisioff, N.P., Handbook of Solid Waste Management and Waste

Minimization Technology, 2002.

4. Grover, V.I., Solid Waste Management, Rotterdam, 2000.

GTK209 Engineering Control Design

This course discusses the relevant theories and applications of engineering knowledge,

especially mechanical and civil engineering in implementing controls to increase the safety

level in the workplace environment. It also explains the preventive measures against

physical hazard in buildings through appropriate selection of building materials. The

elements in planning for a building are also introduce through engineering drawing

practical. Project paperwork will be made to find a solution for any technical problems

which establish at workplace and will be presented as a group presentation. The course will

be conducted via lectures, problem-based learning and practical. Students will be assessed

through quizzes, test, project, discussion, presentation, project paperwork, seminar and

final examination.


1. David, M.L. & Masten, S.J., Principles of Environmental Engineering and

Science. Mc-Graw Hill, 2004.

2. Mohd Zaid Y., Teknologi Industri: Kawalan Mutu dan Peralatan, Dewan Bahasa

& Pustaka, 1996.

3. Indoor Code of Practice (ICOP), DOSH.

GTK210 Occupational Diseases

This course discusses various types of diseases caused by workplace exposures and the

concept of diseases, symptoms and medical measures needed to identify the diseases. It

also covers health monitoring, medical surveillance and preventive measures to be taken.

This course will be conducted via lectures, discussion and fieldtrips. Students will be

assessed through test, assignment, report, seminar, seminar paper and final examination.

109


1. Koran H., Environmental and Occupational Health (2nd Ed.), CRC Press, 2004.

2. Reese C. D., Occupational, Health and Safety Management: A Practical

Approach, Lewis Publishers, 2003.

3. La Dou J., Current Occupational and Environmental Medicine (3rd Ed.), Lange

Medical Books, 2003.

GTK211 Occupational Safety and Health Laws

This course focuses on laws related to occupational safety and health in Malaysia.

Problems encountered in the enforcement of these laws will be discussed. This course will

be conducted via lectures, case study and discussion. Students will be assessed through

assignment, presentation, production, tests and final examination.


1. Akta Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 dan Peraturan-Peraturan.

Undang-Undang Malaysia. ILBS, 2005.

2. Akta Kilang dan Jentera 1967 dan Peraturan-Peraturan. Undang-undang

Malaysia, ILBS, 2005.

3. Akta Keselamatan Sosial Pekerja 1969.

4. Akta Pampasan Pekerja 1952.

5. Akta Kerja 1955.

6. Akta Perkhidmatan Bomba 1988 dan Peraturan-peraturannya.

7. Akta Petroleum (Langkah-langkah Keselamatan) 1984.

8. Akta Bekalan Gas 1993.

GTN208 Nutritional Biochemistry

This course introduces students to the aspects related to metabolism and homeostasis of

several key nutrients of macronutrients and micronutrients such as vitamins and minerals,

body fluid and electrolyte balance, inter-interaction between nutrients, the relationships

between nutrients metabolism and nutrient metabolism related to human body’s

physiological state and human health as well as the occurrence risks of nutritional related

chronic diseases such as cardiovascular disease, diabetes and cancer. The adaptation of

nutrient use during biochemical and physiological-based nutritional-related disorders and

the role of nutritional-related immune effects on maintaining general health well-being and

the prevention of chronic disease will be discussed. This course will be conducted via

lecture and discussion. Students will be assessed through tests, assignment, reports,

presentation and final examination.


1. Bender DA., Introduction to Nutrition and Metabolism (5th Ed.), CRC Press, 2014.

2. Gropper SS, Smith JL, Groff JL., Advanced nutrition and human nutrition (6th

Ed.), Wadsworth Cengage Learning, Belmont, CA, 2013.

3. Kohlmeier M., Nutrient metabolism, Academic Press, London, 2003.

4. Shills ME, Shike M, Ross AC, Caballero B and Cousins RJ., Modern nutrition in

health and disease (10th Ed.), Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2006.

110

5. Lanham-New SA. Macdonald IA, Roche HM., Nutrition and metabolism (2nd

Ed.), Blackwell Science Publishing, 2010.

6. Mann J, Truswell SA., Essentials of human nutrition (2nd Ed.), Oxford University

Press, 2002.

GTN215 Nutrition for Health and Fitness

This course introduces students to the role of nutrition in enhancing one's health, fitness

and sport performance. It also covers health promotion especially the role of energy and

nutrients as the key to all exercise and sports activities. Body composition and weight

control will be discussed in relation to losing or gaining weight through diet and exercise.

This course will be conducted via lectures and discussion. Students will be assessed

through test, assignment, quiz and final examination.


1. Melvin H Williams, Nutrition for Health, Fitness & Sport (10th Ed.), McGraw-

Hill, 2013.

2. Paul Insel, Don Ross, Kimberley McMahon and Melissa Bernstein. Discovering

Nutrition (5th Ed.), Jones & Bartlett Learning, 2016.

3. Melinda M. Manore, and Janice L. Thompson, Sport Nutrition for Health and

Performance (1st Ed.), Human Kinetics, 2005.

4. Judy A. Driskell, Ira Wolinsky, Nutritional Concerns in Recreation, Exercise, and

Sport, Boca Raton, 2009.

GTN217 Assessment of Nutritional Status

This course introduces students to nutritional evaluation in the individual and population.

It also covers direct and indirect methods of assessment of nutritional status, food

calculation and nutrient intake, anthropometric measurement, dietary evaluation,

biochemical evaluation and clinical assessment. The students will collect some of the data

and use reference standards for the different stages of age and classification criteria. This

course will be conducted via lectures, practical sessions and discussion. Students will be

assessed through practical reports, practical test (OSPE), field study report and final

examination.


1. Lee, R.D. and Nieman, D.C., Nutritional Assessment, New York: McGraw-Hill,

2007.

2. Jelliffe, O.D., The Assessment of Nutritional Status in the Community, Geneva:

WHO, 2007.

3. Sauberlich HE, Laboratory Tests for the Assessment of Nutritional Status (2nd

Ed.), CRC Press, 1999.

4. Tee E. Siong et al., Nutrition Composition of Malaysian Food (4th Ed.), Kuala

Lumpur: Malaysian Food Composistion Database Programme, 1997.

5. Bendich, A. and Deckelbaum, R.J. (ed.), Primary & Secondary Preventive

Nutrition, Totowa (N.J., USA); Humana Press, 2001.

GTN218 Nutrition in the Life Cycle

This course introduces students to the changes in nutrition requirements throughout the

human lifecycle and how alteration in nutritional requirements impact on human health. It

http://catalogs.mhhe.com/mhhe/viewProductDetails.do?isbn=007327058X

111

will begin by investigating the influence of nutrition prior to and during conception.

Students will then be introduced to the importance of good maternal nutrition during

pregnancy and lactation and the impact of poor nutritional balance on fetal and infant

development and maternal health. It also covers the assessment of normal growth and body

development during childhood and adolescence and will conclude with discussion on

nutrient needs and factors affecting the nutritional status of adults and the elderly. Face-to-

face lecture and discussion will be used as methods of course content dissemination.

Students will be assessed through quiz and collaborative activities via e-learning.


1. Brown JE, Isaacs JB, Krinke UB, Murtaugh MA, Stang J & Wooldridge NH.,

Nutrition through the life cycle, Wadworth group, CA, USA, 2011.

2. Judith S & Sari E., Essentials of Life Cycle Nutrition. Jones and Bartlett

Publishers, USA, 2011.

3. Worthington-Roberts BS & Williams SR. Nutrition throughout the life cycle (4th

Ed.), McGraw-Hill, Health Professions Division, Boston, 2000.

GTN219 Food Antropology

This course introduces students to the study of human nutrition from the perspective of

anthropology raging from the aspects of biological, ecological and social influence of diet

and human nutrition, referring to how diet affects human behavior and culture, and how

culture affects human behavior and nutrition. It also covers a review of cross-cultural

diversity in terms of diet, nutritional status and life advice system, as well as differences in

the factors of human existence is the result of the evolution of the pre-history to modern

times and provide some basis that can be used to assess the reliability and reasonableness

of the policy and dietary recommendations are featured in daily modern life. This course

will be conducted via lectures and discussion session. Students will be assessed through

test, report, presentation and final examination.


1. Bryant CA, DeWalt KM, Courtney A, and Schwartz J., The Cultural Feast: An

Introduction to Food and Society (2nd Ed.), Belmont, CA: Wadsworth/Thomson

Learning, 2004.

2. Michael Pollan, The Omnivore's Dilemma: A Natural History of Four Meals. NY:

Penguin, 2007.

3. Pamela Goyan Kittler and Kathryn P. Sucher, Food and Culture (4th Ed.),

Belmont, CA: Wadsworth / Thomson Learning, 2004.

GTN220 Nutrition Education and Promotion

This course introduces the students to nutrition education and promotion with special

emphasis on school children and high risk groups. It also introduces methods in planning,

implementing, monitoring and evaluating nutrition education and promotion programs.

This course will be conducted via lectures and discussion. Students will be assessed

through assignment, project task, test and final examination.


1. Isobel R. Contento, Nutrition Education: Linking Research, Theory, and Practice

(2nd Ed.), Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2011.

112

2. Tony Worsley. Nutrition Promotion: Theories and Methods, Systems and

Settings, CAB International, 2008.

GTN221 Nutrition and Disease

This course introduces students to the terms used in medical field, and the underlying

causes, predisposing factors and pathophysiologic changes during diseases of different

system of our body. It also covers effect of the disease on the nutritional status of the

patient, and relationship of the pathophysiological changes with nutrition

prevention/intervention. This course will be conducted via lecture and discussion session.

Students will be assessed through continuous assessment, assignment and final

examination.


1. Ganong WF., Review of Medical Physiology (21st Ed.), Appleton & Lange, 2003.

2. P. Kumar, Clark, Clinical Medicine (5th Ed.), W.B. Saunders Company, 2005.

3. Vinay Kumar, Nelso Fausto, Abdul Abbas, Robbins & Cotnan Pathologic Basis

of Disease (7th Ed.), W.B. Saunders Company, 2004.

GTP203 Speech Pathology Clinic I

This course trains students to observe actively the procedures of history taking, formal and

informal assessment, intervention techniques for speech and language disorders; via live

and recorder clinical sessions. It also emphasis critical thinking through clinical reflection

sessions, and encourage creative thinking through the development of therapy materials.

This course will be conducted via lectures, discussion, and clinical observation sessions.

Students will be assessed through the project and practical exam.



Intervention (4th Ed.). Allyn & Bacon, 2003.

2. Philips, B.J., & Ruscello, D.M., Differential Diagnosis in Speech-Language

Pathology, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1998.

3. Hedge, M.N., Pocket Guide to Assessment in Speech-Language Pathology.

London: Singular Publishing Group, 1998.

4. Shipley, K.G., & McAfee, J.G., Assessment in Speech-Language Pathology: A

Resource Manual (3rd Ed.), Delmar Learning, 2004.

GTP207 Speech Pathology Clinic II

This course trains students to conduct interviewing session under supervision to obtain

history of the patients and gives the students the opportunity to assist the clinician during

the sessions upon the supervisor’s decision. Students will be trained to design intervention

plan, weekly therapy plan, and preparing therapy materials. This course will be conducted

via clinical sessions and discussion. Students will be assessed through clinical

performance, case history report and case presentation.




113

2. Philips, B.J., & Ruscello, D.M., Differential Diagnosis in Speech-Language


3. Hedge, M.N., Pocket Guide to Assessment in Speech-Language Pathology,


4. Shipley, K.G., & McAfee, J.G., Assessment in Speech-Language Pathology: A


GTP210 Clinical Linguistics

This course introduces students to the speech and language measurement methods from the

linguistics perspective. It discusses linguistics method application in speech pathology

especially in speech and language assessment. This course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials and discussion. Students will be assessed through the assignment, quiz,



1. Boehm, J., Daley, G., Harvey, S., Hawkins, A. & Tsap, B., LARSP

(LanguageAssessment Remediation Screening Procedure), Users Manual, 2005.

2. Crystal, D., Profiling linguistic disability, London: Whurr, 1992.

3. Black, M. & Chiat, S., Linguistics for Clinicians, Arnold: London, 2003.

4. Abu Bakar, M., Pengantar Sintaksis & Semantik Bahasa Melayu, Pustaka

Nasional Pte Ltd: Singapura, 2002.

5. Ralph, F., The Sociolinguistics of Language. Oxford: Blackwell, 1990.

GTP211 Paediatric for Hearing and Speech

This course introduces students to the important aspects of paediatric that are relevant to

the fields of audiology and speech pathology. Students learn about embryology; the pre-,

peri- and post-natal processes and its complication. It also focuses on both the normal and

the abnormal development of children, as well as syndromic cases. This course will be

conducted via lectures, tutorials and other face-to-face learning. Students will be assessed

through assignment, quiz, presentation and final examination.


1. Sadler, T. W., Langman’s Medical Embryology (12th Ed.), Philadelphia: Wolters

Kluwer Health/Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012.

2. Haddad. D., Greene, S. & Oliver R., Core Pediatrics and Child Health, London;


3. Berry, C. (Ed), Pediatric Pathology, New York; Springer-Verlag, 1981.

GTP212 Abnormal Psychology

This course introduces students to abnormal psychology. It also covers diagnostic criteria

and application DSM-V in identifying types of abnormal psychology and its effect in

speech and language development. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials,

and visit to psychiatric ward. Students are assessed through essay, assignment, quiz and

final examination.


1. Nolen-Hoeksema, S., Abnormal Psychology (6th Ed.), McGraw-Hill, 2015.

2. American Psychological Association, Publication manual of the American

Psychological Association (5th Ed.), Washington, 2001.

114

3. Davison, G., & Neale, J., Abnormal Psychology (8th Ed.), New York: John Wiley

& Sons, Inc., 2003.

4. Halgin, R.P., & Whitbourne, S.K., Abnormal psychology: Clinical perspectives

on psychological disorders, Dubuque, IA: McGraw-Hill, 2007.

GTP213 Paediatric Language Disorder

This course discusses in depth regarding paediatric language disorders such as receptive

language disorders and expressive language disorders. It also covers methods of

assessment and principles of interventions in managing individuals with language

disorders. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials, and problem based learning.

Students will be assessed through assignments, presentation, quizzes and final

examination.


1. Reed, V., An Introduction to Children with Language Disorders (3rd Ed.), Boston:

Pearson/ Allyn and Bacon, 2005.

2. Owens, R. E., Language Disorders a Functional Approach to Assessment and

Intervention (5th Ed.), Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2009.

3. Vinson, B. P., Language Disorders across the Lifespan: An Introduction (2nd Ed.),

San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2008.

4. Rhea, P., Language Disorders from Infancy through Adolescence: Assessment

and Intervention (3rd Ed.). St. Louis: Mosby, 2006.

GTP214 Speech Sound Disorders

This course is a theoretical course regarding speech sound disorder. The focus of this

course is in managing articulation disorder, phonological disorder, cleft speech, and

developmental motor speech disorder. The topics covered are definition, aetiology, and

management of speech sound disorders. This course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials, and problem-based learning. Students will be assessed through assignments,

presentation, quizzes and final examination.


1. Bleile, K. M., Manual of articulation and phonological disorders: Infancy through

adulthood (2nd Ed.), Clifton Park, NY: Thomson-Delmar Learning, 2004.

2. Dodd, B., The differential diagnosis and treatment of children with speech

disorders, London: Whurr Publishers, 2005.

3. Bernthal, J. E., & Bankson, N. W., Articulation and phonological disorders (5th

Ed.), Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2004.

4. Gordon-Brannan, M. E., & Weiss, C. E., Clinical management of articulatory and

phonologic disorders (3rd Ed.), Baltimore: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2007.

5. Smit, A. G., Articulation and phonology resource guide for school-age children

and adults, Clifton Park, NY: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004.

115

GTP215 Hearing Impairment

This is a theoretical course on hearing impairment and aural re/habilitation. The study of

aural rehabilitation focuses mainly on paediatrics aural habilitation with an additional

exposure on adults’ aural rehabilitation. Hearing impairment and its effects on

communication, audiological management and educational issues will be discussed. This

course emphasises on the methods of assessment and intervention in managing individuals

with hearing impairment.


1. Schow, R. L. & Nerbonne, M. A., Introduction to audiologic rehabilitation (5 th

Ed.), Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2006.

2. Tye-Murray, N., Foundation of aural rehabilitation: Children, adults and their

family (3rd Ed.), San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2008.

3. Doyle, J., Practical audiology for speech-language therapists, London: Whurr

Publisher, 2005.

GTP217 Introduction to Communication Disorders

This course introduces students to communication disorders. It focuses on the disorders of

language, speech sound, voice, fluency and hearing. The topics covered include definitions,

etiologies and characteristics of communication disorders. Overview of the basic principles

of common management procedures for the individual with these disorders is also covered.

This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials, discussions and PBL. Students will be

assessed through quiz, assignment, presentation dan final examination.


1. Gillam, R. B., Marquardt, T. P., & Martin, F. N., Communication sciences and

disorders: From science to clinical practice, San Diego: Singular Publishing

Group, 2010.

2. Hedge, M. N., Introduction to communicative disorders. Austin: Pro-ed, 2010.

3. Shames, G. H., & Anderson, N. B., Human communication disorders: An

introduction (3rd Ed.), Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2006.

GTP218 Acoustic and Phonetics

This course focuses on the aspects of acoustic, phonetics and segmental features of spoken

language by referring to the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA). It also emphasizes the

transcription practices and analysis of normal as well as dialectal variations in Malay

Language. This course will be conducted via lectures, practical sessions and discussions.

Students are assessed through assignment, practical report, presentation, test and final

examination.


1. Roach, P., English Phonetics and Phonology: A Practical Course (3rd Ed.),

Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003.

2. Shriberg, L.D., & Kent, R. D., Clinical Phonetics (3rd Ed.), New York: Allyn &

Bacon, 2002.

116

GTP219 Psycholinguistic

This course discusses the metalinguistic, psychological and neurobiological processes in

the acquisition, understanding and the use of language. Language processing and

production, normal speech error, psycholinguistic of acquired language disorders patient’s,

psycholinguistic of the first and second language acquisition and psycholinguistic of

reading will be discussed. This course also emphasises on the application of this knowledge

to the field of speech pathology.


1. Menn, L. & Dronkers, N. F., Psycholinguistics: Introduction and Applications (2nd

Ed.), San Diego. Plural Publishing, 2017.

2. Field, J., Psycholinguistics a resource book for students, London: Routledge,

2003.

3. Steinberg, D. D., Nagata Hiroshi, & Aline, D. P., Psycholinguistics language,

mind and world, Essex: Longman, 2001.

GTS206 Sports Training Methodology

This course introduces students to the principle of structured training based on scientific

method. It also introduces students to the planning in practice and analysis of athlete’s

achievement in sports. This course will be conducted via lectures and tutorials. Students



1. Bompa T.O., Carlo, B., Periodization Training for Sports (3rd Ed.), Human

Kinetics, 2015.

2. Krasilshchikov O., Basics of Sports Training Methodology, SSS Publications,

New Delhi, 2014.

3. Strength Training for Sport, Handbook of Sports Medicine and Science: An IOC

Medical Commission Publication, Blackwell Science, 2001.

GTS208 Kinanthropometry, Tests and Measurements for Sports Science

This course introduces student to the concepts of kinanthropometry to evaluate physical

condition in athletes. It also introduces students to important tests and measurements in

determining athletes’ fitness. This course will be conducted via lectures and practical

sessions. Students will be assessed through test, practical report and final examination.


1. Morrow, Jr., J. R., Mood, D., Disch, J., Kang, M., Measurement and Evaluation

in Human Performance (5th Ed.), Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2016.

2. Tanner, R., Gore, C., Physiological Tests for Elite Athletes (2nd Ed.), Australian

Sports Commission, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics Publishers, 2013.

GTS209 Sports Nutrition

117

This course introduces students to the knowledge in nutritional requirement to the sports

people in various disciplines, nutritional requirement to different sport event and ergogenic

aid to enhance sport performance. It also covers nutritional planning in pre, during and

post-performance/training so that they can give advice to the athletes about nutritional

status. This course will be conducted via lecture, tutorials and discussion. Students will be

assessed through tests, assignments, presentation and final examination.


1. Fink, H. H., & Mikesky, A. E., Practical Applications in Sports Nutrition, Jones

& Bartlett Learning, 2017.

2. Insel, P., Ross, D., McMahon, K., & Bernstein, M., Nutrition: Jones & Bartlett

Learning, 2016.

3. Dunford, M., & Doyle, J. A., Nutrition for Sport and Exercise, Cengage Learning,

2014.

4. McArdle, W.D., Katch, F.I., Katch, V.L., Exercise Physiology: Energy, Nutrition,

and Human Performance, Philadelphia, PA: Williams & Wilkins, 2006.

GTS210 Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology

This course introduces the interdisciplinary knowledge about the anatomy of the skeletal

muscle and neuro-muscular structure integrated with biomechanics principles. The

knowledge helps to understand the functions and limitations of the body systems,

comprehend the types and causes of movement in sports and analysing body motion. The

course will focus on the development techniques of human motion analysis from the aspect

of structure and function as well as the applied biomechanics principles involved in human

movement. Examples from joint movements and application of sports skills will be used

for the analyses. The course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions.

Students will be assessed through test, practical reports, assignment, presentation and final

examination.


1. Hall, S.J. Basic Biomechanics (6th Ed.), New York: McGraw-Hill, 2012

2. Kerr A., Introductory Biomechanics, Churchill Livingstone, 2010

3. Hamilton, N. and Luttgens, K. Kinesiology: Scientific Basis of Human Motion,

11th ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 2008

4. Bloomfield J, Ackland TR, Elliott BC., Applied Anatomy and Biomechanics in

Sport. Blackwell Sc., 1999.

5. Blazevich A., Sports Biomechanics: The Basics: Optimizing Human Performance

A & C Black, 2010

6. Richards J., Biomechanics in clinic and research: An interactive teaching and

learning course, Churchill Livingst on/Elsevier, 2008

GTS211 Motor Learning

118

This course introduces student to basic concepts and theories of motor learning. This course

also introduces students to research studies that utilise an interdisciplinary approach of

perceptual-motor process and psychological mechanism of motor learning in sports. This

course will be conducted via lectures and practical sessions. Students will be assessed

through test, assignments, and final examination.


1. Magill, R.A., Motor Learning: Concepts and Applications (11th Ed.), Columbus,

OH: McGraw-Hill, 2014.

2. Coker, C.A., Motor Learning and Control for Practitioners (2nd Ed.), New York:

McGraw-Hill, 2013.

3. Schmidt, R., Motor Control and Learning: A Behavioral Emphasis (5th Ed.),

Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2014.

GTX213 Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine

This course introduces students to the basic principles in nuclear medicine. Students will

obtain basic knowledge of radioactivity, radioactive decays, radionuclide and

radiopharmaceutical production methods, types of radiopharmaceuticals used in nuclear

medicine. It also covers radiation detection and radiation monitoring statistics and internal

dose calculations in nuclear medicine imaging. The course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials and student centered learning like discussion. The students will be assessed

through test, presentation and assignment and final examination.


1. Bushberg JT, Seibert JA, Leidholdt EM, Boone JM, The essential physics of

medical imaging (3rd Ed.), Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012.

2. Chandra, R., Nuclear medicine physics: the basics (7th Ed.), Lippincott Williams

& Wilkins, 2012.

3. Saha, G.B., Fundamentals of nuclear pharmacy (6th Ed.), Springer, 2010.

4. Saha, G.B., Physics and radiobiology of nuclear medicine (3rd Ed.), Springer-

Verlag, 2006.

5. Huda, W., Review of Radiologic Physics (3rd Ed.), Lippincott Williams &

Wilkins, 2010.

GTX214 Basic Sciences in Diagnostic Radiology

This course introduces students to the production of ionising radiation, interaction of X-

ray with matter, grids, intensifying screens, radiographic films, ‘Computed Radiography’

and ‘Digital Radiography’. It also covers manual film processing, automatic film

processing and quality control of X-ray films. This course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials and SCL. The students will be assessed through tutorial exercises, continuous

assessment, assignment and final examination.


1. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, E.M. & Boone, J.M., The Essential

Physics of Medical lmaging (2nd Ed.), Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &

Wilkins, 2002.

119

2. Carlton, R.R. & Adler, A.M., Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and A

Science (4th Ed.), New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2006.

3. Bushong, S.C., Radiologic Science for Technologists: Physics, Biology and

Protection (8th Ed.). St Louis: Mosby, 2004.

4. Hendee, W.R. & Ritenour E.R., Medical Imaging Physics (4th Ed.), New York:

Wiley-Liss, 2002.

GTX215 Medical Radiation Physics II

This course introduces students to the physics of electricity which covers the topics of

Coulomb’s law, electric fields, Gauss’ law, electric potential, capacitance, as well as

current and resistance. It also covers physics of magnetism which covers the topics of

magnetic field, magnetic fields due to currents, induction and inductance, electromagnetic

oscillation and alternating current, Maxwell’s equations, as well as electromagnetic waves.

Students will also be introduced to the advancements in medical imaging that are related

to the topics such as electrical impedance tomography, electrocardiography,

electromyography, electroencephalography, magnetoencephalography, and magnetic

resonance imaging. The course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials, and group

discussion. The students will be assessed through tests, assignment, presentation of

tutorials and assignment, as well as final examination.


1. Jearl Walker, Halliday and Resnick, Fundamental of Physics (10th Ed.), Wiley,

2014.

2. Frederick Bueche and Eugene Hecht, Schaum's Outline of College Physics (11th

Ed.), McGrawHill Education, 2012.

3. Martin Zinke-Almang, Physics for Life Sciences, Nelson Education Ltd., 2009.

4. Robert Splinter, Handbook of Physics in Medicine and Biology, CRC Press

(2010).

GTX218 Radiation Protection and Safety I

This course introduces students theoretically regarding biological effects of ionizing

radiation as well as basic principles on radiation protection. Students also will be taught

through lectures and demonstration regarding radiation detection and measurement using

available radiation detectors. This course also discuss the regulatory acts regarding the use

of radiation and radiation safety in Malaysia especially the Atomic Energy Licensing Act

(1984). It also provides input to the students regarding Radiation Protection Program as

recommended by Atomic Energy Licensing Board (AELB). Students will be taught

theoretically and practically regarding radiation protection principles and dosimetry.


1. Ismail Bahari, Mohd Yusof Ismail, Managing Radiation Safety, Atomic Energy

Licensing Board (AELB) McGraw-Hill, 2007

120

2. Abd. Aziz Mohd Ramli, Idris Besar, Radiation Safety (3rd Ed.), Malaysian

Nuclear Agency, 2008

3. Eric J. Hall, Radiobiology for the Radiologist (6th Ed.), Lippincott Williams &

Wilkins, 2005.

4. The Government of Malaysia, Atomic Energy Licensing 1984, Act 304: Basic

Safety Standard (2010), Licensing (1986) and Transportation (1989).

5. Glenn F. Knoll, Radiation Detection and Measurement (3rd Ed.), Elsevier Science,

2000.

GTX219 Basis of Radiation Dosimetry

This course introduces student to the basic principles of radiation dosimetry which

including basic radiation physics, production of x-ray, interaction of radiation, radiation

measurement equipment and clinical beam calibration. This course will be conducted via

lecture, tutorial and seminar. Student will be evaluated through test, quiz, assignment,



1. F. Khan, The Physics of radiation therapy (4th Ed.), Lippincott Williams &

Wilkins (2009)

2. C. Washington and D. Leaver, Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy, (3rd

Ed.), Mosby, 2009.

3. R. Stanton and D. Stinson, Applied Physics for Radiation Oncology, (Revised

Ed.), Medical Physics Publishing, 2009.

GTX220 Diagnostic Radiology Imaging

This course introduces students to the mammography, fluoroscopy, interventional

fluoroscopy, CT scan and MRI. It also covers quality assurance programmes, regulations

on the use of radiation equipment and practical radiation protection. This course will be

conducted via lectures, tutorials and SCL. The students will be assessed through test,

tutorial exercises, presentation and final examination.


1. J T Bushberg, J A Seibert, E M Leidholdt Jr., J M Boone, Lippincott Williams

and Wilkins, The essential physics of medical imaging (3rd Ed.), 2011.

2. Walter Huda, Review of Radiologic Physics (3rd Ed.), Lippincott Williams &

Wilkins, 2010.

3. W R Hendee, E R Ritenour, Medical Imaging Physics (4th Ed.), Willy-Liss, 2002.

4. Geoffrey D. Rubin & Neil M. Rofsky, CT and MR Angiography: Comprehensive

Vascular Assessment, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009.

5. John R Haaga, Charles F Lanzieri, Robert C Gilkeson, CT and MRI imaging of

the whole body (4th Ed.), Mosby, 2003.

GTX221 Nuclear Medicine Imaging

121

This course introduces students to the in-vivo radiation detection and the major

components of imaging equipment including gamma camera SPECT/CT and PET scanner.

Image formation in nuclear medicine imaging with the performance parameters for gamma

camera, SPECT/CT and PET scanner and quality assurance will be discussed. Imaging

techniques of gamma camera, SPECT/CT and PET scanner will be introduced. The course

will be conducted via lectures and tutorials. The students will be assessed through test,

assignment, presentation and final examination.


1. Cherry, S.R., Sorenson, J.A. and Phelps, M.E., Physics in Nuclear Medicine (4th

ed.), Saunders, 2012.

2. Kowalsky, R.J., Falen, S.W. and Kowalsky, R., Radiopharmaceuticals in Nuclear

Pharmacy and Nuclear Medicine (3rd Ed.), Washington, D.C., 2011.

3. Saha, G.B., Physics and Radiobiology of Nuclear Medicine (3rd Ed.), Springes-

Verlag, 2010.

4. Prekeges, J., Nuclear Medicine Instrumentation (2nd Ed.), Jones & Bartlett

Learning, 2013.

5. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, E.M. and Boone, J.M., Essential Physics

of Medical Imaging (3rd Ed.), Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2012.


GTA305 Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology

This course introduces students to the electroacoustic measurement, compression systems,

directional microphone, advanced signal processing schemes, prescription and outcome

measurement of hearing aids, and special issues in hearing aids for children. It also covers

the assistive listening devices (ALDs), Contralateral Routing of Signal (CROS), bone

conduction hearing aids, bone anchored hearing aids (BAHA), cochlear implant, middle

ear implant, and auditory brainstem implant. Physiology, components, medical and

surgical aspects, selection of candidates, programming, rehabilitation, outcome and

predictive factors cochlear implants are also emphasized. This course will be conducted

via lectures, tutorials, practical and problem-based learning (PBL). Students will be

assessed through test, assignment, practical report and final examination.

122


1. Dillon, H., Hearing Aids (2nd Ed.), Thieme, 2012.

2. Ricketts, T., Bentler, R., & Mueller, H. G., Modern Hearing Aids Function,

Features, and Advanced Algorithms, San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2014.

3. Mueller, H. G., Ricketts, T., & Bentler, R., Modern Hearing Aids Pre-Fitting

Testing and Selection Considerations, San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2012.

4. Bentler, R., Mueller, H. G., & Ricketts, T., Modern Hearing Aids Verification,

Outcome Measures, and Follow-Up, San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2013.

5. Ruckenstein, M., Cochlear Implants and Other Implantable Hearing Devices, San

Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2012.

GTA307 Audiology Clinic II

This course is a continuation from Audiology Clinic I course. In this course, students are

attached to Audiology Clinic in USM for two days clinic per week and supervised under

experienced Audiologists for 14 weeks. This clinical training covers adult and pediatric

cases, interviewing session for history taking, basic tests such as otoscopic examination,

tympanometry, acoustic reflex and pure tone audiometry (with and without masking). This

course will be conducted through clinical supervision, discussion and PBL. Students will

be assessed through supervisor’s evaluation (practical), report, presentation, log book and

final exam. In order to pass this course, student must pass the coursework components and

final examination (Objective Structured Clinical Examination, OSCE) with at least grade

C+.


1. Valente, M. & Valente, L. M., Adult Audiology Casebook, New York: Thieme,

2015.



3. Welling, D.R., & Ukstins, C.A., Fundamentals of Audiology for the Speech-

language Pathologist. Burlington: Jones & Bartlett Learning, 2015.

4. Hall, J. W., Introduction to Audiology, Boston: Pearson, 2014.

5. Madell, J. R. & Flexer, C., Pediatric Audiology: Diagnosis, Technology, and

Management (2nd Ed.), New York: Thieme, 2014.

GTA308 Evaluation of Balance System

This course introduces students to the function of balance and vestibular system, related

diseases and their pathophysiology, importance of nystagmus in clinical diagnosis, neuro-

otological and vestibular evaluations as well as the management of patients with balance

and vestibular disorders. This course also covers the relationship between the vestibular

test results and the related ear pathologies. This course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials and practical sessions. Students will be assessed through tests, presentation,

practical reports and final examination.


1. Hamid, M. & Sismanis, A., Medical Otology and Neurotology: A Clinical Guide

to Auditory and Vestibular Disorders, New York: Thieme, 2006.

123

2. Luxon, L. M., Furman, J. M., Martini, A. & Stephens, D., Textbook of

Audiological Medicine: Clinical Aspects of Hearing and Balance, CRC Press,

2003.

3. Furman, J. M. & Cass, S. P., Vestibular Disorders: A Case-study Approach, New

York: Oxford University Press, 2003.

GTA309 Audiology Clinic III

This course is a continuation from Audiology Clinic I and II courses. In this course,

students are attached to Audiology Clinic in USM for two days clinic per week and

supervised via experienced Audiologists for 14 weeks. Apart from conducting history

taking and basic audiological tests, students are also involved in prescribing, fitting and

evaluating hearing aid performance as well as taking ear impression. Students are also

trained in explaining test results and giving counseling to patients. This course will be

conducted through clinical supervision, discussion and PBL. Students will be assessed

through supervisor’s evaluation (practical), report, presentation, log book and final exams.

In order to pass this course, each student must pass the coursework components and final

examinations (Objective Structured Clinical Examination, OSCE and clinical viva) with at

least grade C+.



2015.








GTA310 Basic Medical Management for Audiologist and Speech Pathologist

This course introduces students to the aspects of basic human anatomy and physiology and

basic clinical examination that covers the respiratory, cardiovascular and neurology

systems, and special senses (smell, vision and sensation). It also introduces basic laboratory

and radiological investigations and basic treatment options such as pharmacology,

operation, physiotherapy and occupational therapy as well as basic emergency procedures.

This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions. The students



1. Barbara Herlihy, B., The Human Body in Health and Illness (3rd Ed.),

Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders Company, 2006.

124

2. Marieb, E. N., Anatomy & Physiology Coloring Workbook: A Complete Study

Guide, (9th Ed.), San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings, 2008.

3. Sembulingam K. & Sembulingam, P. Essentials of Medical Physiology (3rd Ed.).

India: Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers, 2004.

4. Tortora, G. J. & Derrickson, B. H., Principles of Anatomy and Physiology (12 th

Ed.), New York: John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2009.

GTA311 Audiological Rehabilitation

This course introduces students to the importance of audiological rehabilitation, roles of

the involved professionals, auditory and visual aspects in communication, psychosocial

aspects of hearing loss, and rehabilitation techniques for children and adults with hearing

loss, tinnitus and vestibular disorders. It also covers important issues such as the effects of

hearing loss on language development and the communication modes for individuals with

pre-lingual and post-lingual hearing loss. This course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials and practical sessions. Students will be assessed through test, presentation,

practical report and final examination.


1. Johnson, C. E., Introduction to Auditory Rehabilitation: A Contemporary Issues

Approach, Allyn & Bacon, 2011.

2. Wolfe, J., & Schafer, E., Programming Cochlear Implants (Core Clincal Concepts

in Audiology), San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2010.

3. Seewald, R., & Tharpe, A. M. Comprehensive Handbook of Pediatric Audiology,

San Diego: Plural Publishing Inc., 2010.

4. Herdman, S. J., Vestibular Rehabilitation (3rd Ed.), F. A. Davis Company, 2007.



GTB316 Transfusion Science and Blood Banking

This course introduces students to the concept and knowledge of transfusion science and

blood banking. It covers topics of human blood group systems, blood donation, preparation

and types of blood component, pretransfusion testing, laboratory management and

complication of blood transfusion. The course will be conducted via integrated teaching

and learning approach, which comprise of lectures, practical and discussion. Students will

be assessed through tests, practical reports, presentation and final examination.


1. Blaney K. D. & Howard P. R., Basic & Applied Concepts of Blood Banking and

Transfusion Practices (3rd Ed.), Elsevier Saunders, 2012.

2. Gretchen J., Zundel W. & Gockel-Blessing E., Clinical Laboratory Blood

Banking and Transfusion Medicine Practices (1st Ed.), Pearson, 2014.

3. Harmening D. M., Modern Blood Banking and Transfusion Practices (6th Ed.),

F.A. Davis Company, 2012.

4. Knight, R., Transfusion & Transplant Science (Fundamentals of Biomedical

Science), Oxford University Press, 2013.

GTB317 Laboratory and Clinical Hematology

125

This course introduces students to the concept and knowledge of clinical and laboratory

hematology. It covers topics on haematological diseases (red blood cells, white blood cells,

platelet and coagulation factor), laboratory investigations, laboratory management and

instrumentations. The course will be conducted via integrated teaching and learning

approach, which comprise of lectures, practical and seminar. Students will be assessed

through tests, reports, presentation and final examination.


1. Bain, B. J. & Bates, I., Laffan, M. A. & Lewis, S. M., Dacie & Lewis Practical

Haematology (11th Ed.), Churchill Livingstone Elservier, 2012.

2. Harmening, D. M., Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostasis (5th

Ed.), F. A. Davis Company, 2008.

3. Hoffbrand A. V., Catovsky D., Tuddenham E. G. D, & Green A. R., Postgraduate

Haematology (6th Ed.), Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.

4. Hoffbrand A. V., Lewis S. M., & Tuddenham E. G. D., Postgraduate

Haematology (4th Ed.), Butterworth Heinemann, 1997.

5. Hoffbrand, A. V. & Moss P. A. H., Essential Haematology (6th Ed.), Wiley-

Blackwell, 2011.

GTB318 Pharmacology II

This course introduces students to the concept of advance pharmacology and application

in health. It covers pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic, pharmacogenetic, quantitative

pharmacology, systemic pharmacology and an introduction to pharmacology research. The

topics include the research in drug discovery and post-marketing surveillance. The course

will be conducted via lecture, practical, discussion and field trips. The students will be

assessed through tests, assignment, practical reports, presentation and final examination.


1. Ritter, J. M., Flower, R. J., Henderson, G. & Rang H. P., Rang & Dale’s

Pharmacology (8th Ed.), Churchill Livingstone, 2015.

2. Whalen, K., Lippincott’s Illustrated Reviews: Pharmacology (6th Ed.), Lippincott

Williams & Wilkins, 2014.

3. Katzung, B. & Trevor, A. J., Basic and Clinical Pharmacology (13th Ed.),

McGraw-Hill Education/Medical, 2015.

4. Rosenbaum, S. E., Basic Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics: An

Integrated Textbook and Computer Simulations (2nd Ed.), John Wiley & Sons

Inc., 2016.

GTB319 Toxicology

This course covers the introduction of toxicology, quantitative aspects and kinetics

including the effects of dose, effect and tissue responses to toxic agents, the excretion of

toxic substances, toxic reaction compounds, toxic substances such as solvent, food

additives, herbicides and pesticides, detergents and materials other materials, the size of

the levels of toxicity testing, invitro and invivo, toxicokinetic, toxicity to target organs,

particularly the human, carcinogen, mutagen teratogen, the mechanism of toxicity,

laboratory tests, an antidote, and treatment. Students are exposed to toxic substances and

exposures common to genetoxicity and issues when using chemicals that are harmful. In

126

addition, students will be trained in the principles and practical techniques used in

laboratory tests, such as acute and chronic toxicity, carcinogenecity, the detection of trace

elements (trace elements), the isolation and testing of compounds and the use of tools to

study such as spectroscopy, chromatography.


1. Tripathy, K. D., Essentials of Medical Pharmacology (7th Ed.), New Delhi: Jaypee

Brothers, 2013.

2. Klaassen, C. & Watkins J. B., Casarett and Doull's Essentials of Toxicology (3rd

Ed.), McGraw-Hill Education/Medical, 2015.

3. Harvey, R. A., Clark, M. A., Finkel, R., Ray, J. A. & Whalen, K., Lippincott’s

Illustrated Reviews (5th Ed.), Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2011.

4. Katzung, B. G., Masters, S. B. & Trevor, A. J., Basic and Clinical Pharmacology

(12th Ed.), New York: McGraw-Hill Professional Publishing, 2012.

GTB320 Medical Virology and Mycology

This course introduces students to the concept of medical virology and mycology which

covers important characteristics of viruses, the antigenic structure of viruses that initiate

disease, the life cycle and its multiplication process in the host cells, pathogenesis, sign and

symptoms of the disease, diagnostic test for the identification of the infection caused by

viruses, appropriate clinical specimens that need to be taken from the patients, type of

treatment, control and prevention also will be focused. The course will be conducted via

lectures, practical and tutorials. The students will be assessed through assignments,

presentations, tests and final examination.


1. Alberts, B., Johnson, A., Lewis, J., Raff, M., Roberts, K. & Walter, P., Molecular

Biology of the Cell (5th Ed.), Garland Science, 2007.

2. Brown, S. M., Next-Generation DNA Sequencing Informatics, Cold Spring

Harbor Laboratory Press, 2013.

3. Nelson, D. L. & Cox, M. M., Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry (6th Ed.), W.

H. Freeman, 2012.

4. Sheehan, M. N., Protein Engineering: Design, Selection and Applications, Nova

Science Publishers Inc., 2013.

5. Murray, R., Bender, D., Botham, K.M., Kennelly, P.J., Rodwell, V. & Weil, P.A.,

Harper's Biochemistry (29th Ed.), McGraw-Hill Medical, 2012.

GTB322 Medical Bacteriology

This course covers the detailed knowledge of general characteristics of medically important

bacteria. It covers fundamental aspects include effect of these organisms to human health,

their role in the course of diseases, epidemiology, reservoirs, bacterial transmission,

pathogenesis of diseases and clinical manifestations. The students will also be taught on

appropriate clinical specimens collection and transportation techniques, the principle and

processing techniques of laboratory detection, isolation and identification of pathogenic

bacteria. Student will acquire knowledge concerning on advantages and disadvantages of

available laboratory techniques or tests (such as staining, culture, serological tests and

molecular methods) used for bacterial detection. Prevention, control methods and treatment

127

of the diseases caused by those bacteria are also discussed. The course will be conducted

via lecture, practical and tutorial. The students will be assessed through tests, practical tests,



1. Talaro, K. P. & Talaro, A., Foundations in Microbiology (3rd Ed.), McGraw Hill,

1999.

2. Tortora, G. J., Funke, B. R. & Case, C. L., Microbiology: An Introduction (7 th

Ed.), Wesley Longman, 2001.

3. Black, J. G., Microbiology, Principles and Explorations (5th Ed.), John Wiley

Publication, 2002.

4. Prescott, L. M., Harley, J. P. & Klein, D. A., Microbiology (5th Ed.), McGraw

Hill, 2002.

5. Cheesbrough, M., District Laboratory Practice in Tropical Countries (2nd Ed.),

Cambridge University press, 2006.

GTB323 Medical Parasitology

This course covers the definitions, classifications and nomenclatures of protozoa,

helminths and arthropods that affect human health. The theoretical and/or practical aspects

of routine and/or molecular diagnosis of various medically important parasites will be

discussed. The external morphology, life cycle, epidemiology, brief pathogenesis,

prevention and control of various parasites will be also discussed. Medically important

parasites in Malaysia will be given more emphasis. In addition, the structure, function and

management of a typical parasitology laboratory will be discussed. The course will be

conducted via lecture, tutorial and practical. The students will be assessed through

assignments, presentations, discussion, tests and final examination.


1. Bogitsh, B. J., Carter, C. E. & Oeltmann, T. N., Human Parasitology (4th Ed.),

Elsevier Academic Press, 2013.

2. Halton, D. W., Behnke, J. M. & Marshall, I., Practical Exercises in Parasitology,

Cambridge University press, 2001.

3. Parija, S. C., Textbook of Medical Parasitology (3rd Ed.), All India Publishers &

Distributors, 2006.

4. Leventhal, R. & Cheadle, R. F., Medical Parasitology: A Self-Instructional Text,

Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Co., 2002.

GTB324 Clinical Biochemistry

This course introduces students to the theory and pathophysiological biochemistry of the

human body. Students will be exposed to the principles of biochemical tests in the

laboratory, and the interpretation of results, diagnostic procedures in chemical pathology

including specimen receiving and processing, reagent preparation, diagnostic tests such as

liver function test, renal, pancreas and gastrointestinal tract, measurement of pH and acid-

base haemostasis of the body, electrolytes, determination of enzyme activities, blood

128

glucose, protein and other major biochemical parameters in diagnostic biochemistry.

Students will also be exposed to the manual diagnostic procedures and in the application

of laboratory automation for clinical diagnosis, quality control program and laboratory

administration, as well as to actual working environment through short attachments at the

Chemical Pathology Laboratory, School of Medical Sciences. The course will be

conducted via lecture, practical and seminar. The students will be evaluated through tests,

SPOT/OSPE (practical tests), presentation and final examination.


1. Allan, M. H., Michael, M., Rajeev, S., Robert, C. & O'Reilly, D., Clinical

Biochemistry: An Illustrated Colour Text (5th Ed.), Churchill Livingstone, 2013.

2. Burtis, C. A. & Ashwood, E. R., Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical Chemistry and

Molecular Diagnostics (7th Ed.), Saunders, 2014.

3. Harold, V., Practical Clinical Biochemistry (5th Ed.), CBS Publishers &

Distributors, 2000.

4. Landy, J.M., Textbook of Urinalysis and Body Fluids: A Clinical Approach.

LWW Publisher, 1997.

5. Bishop, M. L., Duben-Engelkirk, J. L. & Fody, E. P., Clinical Chemistry:

Principles, Procedures, Correlations. 5th Edition, LWW Publisher, 2004.

GTB325 Clinical Diagnostic Laboratory Management

The course introduces students to the concept and knowledge of total quality management

(TQM) in clinical diagnostic laboratory that emphasizes on the deployment of quality

assurance principles and best practice through the development and implementation of

quality assurance plans and phases. It also covers topics on the concept of sustainability,

occupational safety and health, the quality systems, ISO 9001 and MS ISO 15189, in

relation to the management of clinical diagnostic laboratory. The course will be conducted

via lectures, seminars, online learning activities and management attachment in various

clinical diagnostic laboratories. The students will be evaluated through online collaboration

assignment, written test, electronic small group discussions, seminar presentations and

final examination.


1. Centre for Global Sustainability Studies. USM Policy on Sustainability 2014.

USM, 2014.

2. Cooper, G. & Gillions, T., Producing Reliable Test Results in the Medical

Laboratory, Bio-Rad Laboratories Inc, 2007.

3. Department of Standards Malaysia MS ISO/IEC 17025:2007, General

Requirements for the Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories,

Cyberjaya: Department of Standards Malaysia, 2007.

4. Department of Standards Malaysia. MS ISO 15189:2008, Medical Laboratories -

Particular Requirements for Quality and Competence, Cyberjaya: Department of

Standards Malaysia, 2008.

GTD321 Therapeutic Diet Preparation

This course gives practical training in the methods of therapeutic diet preparation for

various disease conditions. Usage of foods for meal preparation and the minimisation of

129

food wastage will be discussed during diet preparation. Purchase of raw materials,

calculation of the nutrient contents in a prepared food item, preparation methods, food

serving and sensory evaluation will be emphasised. Lectures on therapeutic diet

preparation protocols will be given before the practical session. Assessment will be based

on the student’s ability in selecting/purchasing raw materials, nutrient calculations,

demonstration of food serving and sensory evaluation.


1. Shahar, S., Safil, N. S., Manaf, Z. A. & Haron, H., Atlas of Food Exchanges &

Portion Sizes (3rd Ed.), Kuala Lumpur: MDC, 2015.

2. Sakinah, H., Komposisi Makronutrien 100 Makanan Kelantan. Pusat Pengajian

Sains Kesihatan, 2010.

3. Mahan, L. K. & Raymond, J. L., Krause’s Food, Nutrition & Diet Therapy (14th

Ed.), Saunders Co., 2017.

4. Maher, A. K., Simplified Diet Manual (10th Ed.), Blackwell Publishing

Professional, 2007.

GTD323 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II

This course introduces students to the standard nutrition care process and therapeutic diet

for peadiatric case, renal, hepatobiliary and neurology. Students will be taught on the ways

to prepare a menu plan based on principle of medical nutrition therapy including the use of

infant formula/ specialized infant formula. Theoretical and practical aspects of the medical

nutrition therapy that has to be given to the patients with various diseases will be discussed.

Students will be assessed through test, assignment, presentation and final examination.




2. Shaw, V., Clinical Paediatric Dietetics (4th Ed.), John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2015.

3. Whitney, W., Understanding Normal & Clinical Nutrition (11th Ed.), Australia:

Wadsworth, 2017.

4. Nelms, M. H., Medical Nutrition Therapy: A Case Study Approach (5th Ed.),

Thomson Wadsworth, 2016.

GTD327 Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy III

This course introduces students to the standard nutrition care process and therapeutic diet

for respiratory diseases, cancer and critically ill patients. It also covers the ward

management, provision of enteral feeding and complication management. Each topic will

discuss the theoretical and practical aspects of the medical nutrition therapy that has to be

given to the patients with various diseases. Students will be assessed through test,



130



2. Shaw, V., Clinical Paediatric Dietetics (4th Ed.), John Wiley & Sons, Ltd, 2015.

3. Whitney, W., Understanding Normal & Clinical Nutrition (11th Ed.), Australia:

Wadsworth, 2017.



GTD328 Dietetics Skill

This course will introduce the students with certain important skills as a dietitian such as

communication, medical and dietary data collection, documentation, dietetics counseling

and interviewing techniques will be exposed and taught to the students. The course will

also emphasise on the aspects of competency in dietetic, evidence based practice, nutrition

care process (NCP), nutritional intervention, enteral and parenteral nutritional support,

NCP documentation, medical record, presentation and writing skills and ethics in dietetics

profession will be discussed.


1. Bauer, K. D & Liou, D., Nutrition Counseling and Education Skill Development,

Wadsworth Publisher Co., 2016.





4. Samour, P. Q & King, K., Pediatric Nutrition, Jones & Bartlet Learning, 2012.

GTD329 Research Project in Dietetics I

This course provides the opportunity to the student to prepare dietetics related research

project proposal under the supervision of lecturer. Besides preparing the research project

proposal, this course exposes the students to reference management software and

techniques related to research proposal writing. This course will be conducted by

supervision of research proposal preparation and discussion. Students will be assessed

through research proposal, presentation and discussion.


1. Minichiello, V., Sullivan, G., Greenwood, K. & Axford, R., Handbook for

Research Methods in Health Sciences, Australia: Addison Wesley, Longman,

1999.

2. Montgomery, D.C., Design and Analysis of Experiments (5th Ed.), New York:


3. Guidelines for the preparation of final year research project dissertation. School

of Health Sciences, USM, 2015.

4. Any books/journals relevant to the fields or topics of research chosen by the

students.

131

GTF305 Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drugs

This course introduces students to the fundamental concepts of toxicology, forensic

toxicology, poison, multiple poisoned material, chemistry and appearance of poisoned

material, multiple procedures, techniques and equipment employed to extract, identify and

profile the poisoned material from biological and autopsy specimens. Classification and

identification of drugs that commonly abused, modes of action in human body and

techniques to identify and detect them will also be emphasised. This course will be

conducted via lectures, discussion, PBL and practical. Students will be assessed through

tests, assignments, practical reports, practical test and final examination.


1. Moffat, A. C., Osselton, M. D. & Widdop, B., Clarke's Analysis of Drugs and

Poisons, London: Pharmaceutical Press, 2011.

2. Flanagan, R. J., Taylor, A. A., Watson, I. D. & Whelpton, R., Fundamentals of

Analytical Toxicology, New Jersey: Wiley-Interscience, 2008.

3. Jickell, S., Negrusz, A., Moffat, A. C, Osselton, M. D. & Widdop, B., Clarke

Analytical Forensic Toxicology, London: Pharmaceutical Press, 2008.

4. Karch, S. B., Postmorterm Toxicology of Abused Drugs, Boca Raton: CRC Press,

2008.

GTF306 Fire Investigation

This course introduces students to basics of fire and the causative factors of fire, including

the different types of material evidences often encountered in structure fires and forest fires

as well as the methodology to collect and pack them and appropriate instrumental analysis

to process the evidence materials to determine the cause of fire and safety measures during

investigation. This course will be conducted via lectures, fire demonstration and fire

investigation. Students will be assessed through tests, reports, discussion, presentation and

final examination.


1. David, J. I., Dehaan, J. D. & Haynes, G. A., Forensic Fire Scene Reconstruction

(3rd Ed.), New York: Pearson, 2012.

2. DeHaan, J. D., Kirk, P. L. & Icove, J. D., Kirk’s Fire Investigation (7th Ed.), New

York: Pearson, 2012.

3. NFPA 921: Guide for Fire and Explosion Investigations, Maryland: National Fire

Protection Agency, 2011.

4. Stauffer, E., Dolan, J. A. & Newman, R., Fire Debris Analysis, Burlington:


5. Redsicker, D. R., Practical Fire and Arson Investigation (2nd Ed.), Boca Raton:

CRC Press, 1997.

GTF309 Forensic DNA Analysis

This course introduces students to the fundamental knowledge associated to various

forensic DNA analysis as well as the problems associated in each technology involving

DNA analysis and ways of troubleshooting to solve the problems. Students will be trained

to use apparatus and latest software invented for DNA analysis and interprets the result

accordingly to solve forensic cases which involved DNA analysis and lead to better

132

understanding on the importance of DNA technology in the field of Forensic Sciences.

This course will be conducted via lectures and practical. Students will be assessed through

tests, presentation, practical reports, practical test and final examination.


1. Butler, J. M., Advanced Topics in Forensic DNA Typing: Methodology,

Academic Press, 2011

2. Butler, J. M., Fundamentals of Forensic DNA Typing, Academic Press, 2009.

3. Rudin, N. & Inman, K., An Introduction to Forensic DNA Analysis (2nd Ed.),

CRC Press, 2001.

4. Butler, J. & Butler, J. M., Biology and Technology Behind STR Markers,


5. Budowle, B., Smith, J. & Moretti T., DNA Typing Protocols: Molecular Biology

and Forensic Analysis, Eaton Pub. Co., 2000.

GTF311 Forensic Anthropology

This course introduces the students the fundamentals of forensic anthropology, the types

of biological and peripheral evidence useful in anthropological analysis, crime scene and

excavation techniques, handling the skeletal remains, anthropometric and anthroposcopic

techniques useful for assessing race, sex, age and personal identification and the limitation

therein, photo to photo comparison and anthropological reconstruction of population

biology. This course will be conducted via lectures, practical and discussion. Students will

be assessed through tests, presentation, practical reports, practical test and final

examination.


1. Wilkinson, C., Forensic Facial Reconstruction, Cambridge University Press,

2004.

2. Byers, S. N., Introduction to Forensic Anthropology, Allyn and Bacon, 2000.

3. Siegel, J., Knupfer, G. & Saukko, P., Encyclopedia of Forensic Sciences,


4. Clement, J. G. & Ranson, D. L., Craniofacial Identification in Forensic Medicine,

London: Arnold, 1998.

5. Iscan, M. Y. & Helmer, R. P., Forensic Analysis of the Skull – Cranio Facial

Analysis, Reconstruction, and Identification, New York: Wiley Liss Inc., 1993.

GTF313 Food Chemistry

This course introduces students to the classification and structure of carbohydrates,

proteins, oils and fats. It also covers food flavour and food additives, food forensics and

the importance of quality control in food. This course will be conducted via lectures and

discussion. Students will be assessed through tests, discussion, project proposal and final

examination.


1. Otles, S., Methods of Analysis of Food Components and Additives, Boca Raton:

CRC Press, 2011.

2. Belitz, H-D., Grosch, W. & Schieberle, P., Food Chemistry, Springer, 2009

133

3. Damodaran, S., Parkin, K.L. & Fennema, O.R., Fennema's Food Chemistry, CRC

Press, 2007

4. Akoh, C. C. & Min, D. B., Food Lipids: Chemistry, Nutrition, and Biotechnology,

Boca Raton: CRC, 2008.

5. Frey, C. & Rouseff, R., Natural Flavors and Fragrances: Chemistry, Analysis, and

Production, Washington, DC: American Chemical Society, 2005.

GTF315 Biological Evidence

This course introduces the students to the multiple biological specimens that are found at

the crime scenes, the methods of observing, describing and collecting them, their salient

morphological features useful for identification and the procedures used in the laboratory

to investigate these evidence. This course will be conducted via lectures, discussion and

practical. Students will be assessed through tests, assignments, practical reports, quiz and

final examination.


1. Gunn, A., Essentials of Forensic Biology (2nd Ed.), Wiley, 2009.

2. Saferstein, R., Forensic Science Handbook, Vol. II & III, (2nd Ed.), New Jersey:

Prentice-Hall, 2009.

3. Byrd, J. H. & Castner, J. L., Forensic Entomology: The Utility of Arthropods in

Legal Investigations (2nd Ed.), CRC Press, 2009.

4. Ogle, R. R. & Fox, M. J., Atlas of Human Hair Microscopic Characteristics, Boca

Raton: CRC Press, 1999.

5. Robertson, J. & Grieve, M., Forensic Examination of Fibres, London: Taylor &

Francis, 1999.

GTF316 Natural Products Chemistry

This course introduces students to biosynthesis of natural secondary metabolites, synthetic

pathway of natural products such as acetate, shikimate, mevalonate and alkaloid. It also

discusses the development and synthetic works of natural product and its analogues as well

as current developments and future directions in the field of natural products. This course

will be conducted via lectures and discussion. Students will be assessed through tests,

discussion, project proposal and final examination.


1. Stanforth, S. P., Natural Product Chemistry at a Glance, Blackwell Publishing,

2006.

2. Hornback, J. M., Organic Chemistry, Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2005.

3. Torssel, K. B. G., Natural Product Chemistry: Mechanic and Biosynthetic

Approach to Secondary Metabolism, John Wiley & Sons, 1982.

4. Sarker, S. D. and Nahar, L., Chemistry for Pharmacy Students: General Organic

and Natural Product Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.

GTF317 Introduction to Criminology

134

This course introduces students to basic concepts and theories in criminology. This

knowledge would enable students to understand issues and problems of specific crime

clusters for example youth, environment, media, technology, and others. This course will

be conducted via lectures and discussion. Students will be assessed through test,

assignments, reports and final examination.


1. Siegel, L. J., Criminology: Theories, Patterns and Typologies (11th Ed.),

Nadworth, 2012.

2. Doerner, W. G and Lab, S. P., Victimology (6th Ed.), Anderson, 2011.

3. Berkan, S. E., Criminology: A Sociological Understanding (5th Ed.), Prentice

Hall, 2011.

GTK312 Ergonomic

This course introduces students to the theories and applications of ergonomic and body

mechanics at workplace in order to prevent workers from injuries. It covers the role of

occupational health and safety officers in monitoring the application of proper ergonomics,

body mechanics, possible injuries for specific task and the preventive or rehabilitation of

workers at workplace. Specific work process, injuries preventive measure and

rehabilitation intervention as well return to work program if there are any injuries sustained

by the workers will be discussed. The course will be conducted via lectures and case

discussions. Students will be assessed through performance in practical operation, log

books, reports and final examination.


1. Redman, D., & Lunbeck, A., Ergonomics: Body Mechanics and Self-care for

Bodyworkers, Pearson, 2012.

2. Nicholson, A. S. & Ridd, J. E., Health Safety and Ergonomics, Butterworth, 1988.

3. Menckel, E. & Westerholm, P., Evaluation in Occupational Health Practice.

Butterworth-Heinemann. 1999.

GTK313 Pest and Vector Control

This course explains the knowledge, concepts and vector and pest control skills. This

course covers the introduction of vectors and pests, vector-borne diseases and pest, cases

or epidemiological investigations based on etiology, virus reservoir, transmission,

incubation time, duration of infection, susceptibility and endurance, clinical diagnosis,

treatment principles, environmental sampling, methods/preventive and control measures of

vector and pest disease control, enforcement and prosecution aspects under the

act/regulation in relation to public health legislation, risk assessment and risk

communication. This course will be conducted through lectures, practical exercises, and

field surveys. Students will be assessed through practical reports, assignments, discussions,

presentations, tests and final examination.


1. Van Emden, H. F. & Service, M.C., Pest and Vector Control, Cambridge

University Press, 2004.

2. Rozendall, J. A., Vector Control: Methods for Use by Individuals and

Communities, WHO, 1997.

3. Bennett, G. W., Owens, J. M. & Corrigan, R. M., Truman’s Scientific Guide to

135

Pest Management Operations (7th Ed.), Purdue University, 2010.

4. Pratt, H. D. & Moore C. G., Mosquitoes of Public Health Importance and Their

Control, CDC, 1993.

GTK314 Communicable Disease Control

This course explains the knowledge and skills required in protecting the health of the public

on matters related to disease control. It covers epidemiology of infectious and non-

infectious diseases, case management or epidemiology of infectious diseases based on

infectious agents, incubation periods and infections, transmission of disease, cause of

infection, signs and symptoms of disease, disease diagnosis and detection. In addition, case

management and environmental sampling management, preventive and control measures

of infectious and non-infectious diseases, enforcement and prosecution aspects under the

public health legislation, risk assessment and risk communication will be discussed in

depth. This course will be conducted via lectures, practical, and fieldwork. Students will

be assessed through tests, practical reports, discussions, presentations, assignments and

final examination.


1. Webber, R., Communicable Diseases: Epidemiology and Control,

Wallingford: CABI Publishing, 1996.

2. M’ikanatha, N. M. & Iskandar, J., Concepts and Methods in Infectious Diseases

Surveillance. Wiley-Blackwell, 2014.

3. Noah, N. D. & Norman, D., Controlling Communicable Diseases, Maidenhead,

2006.

4. Jeremy, H., Norman, B., Lain, B., Ralfm R. & Julius, W., Communicable Disease

Control Handbook (2nd Ed.), BlackWell Publishing, 2001.

GTK315 Occupational Safety and Health Management

This course introduces students to the system of occupational safety and health

management practice in Malaysia as OSHAS 18001, ILO-OSH 2001 and MS 1722 to a

caring attitude and self-regulates the workers and employers to create a work environment

that is safe and healthy. It also includes documentation, training, performance assessment

and audit methodology. Course content is streamlined with content of module I of the

Safety and Health Officer course as regulated by the Department of Occupational Safety

and Health (DOSH), Ministry of Human Resources, Malaysia. This course will be

conducted via lecture, tutorials and field visit. Students will be assessed through test,

assignments, presentation and final examination.


1. Saad, A., Occupational Safety and Health Management, Penerbit Universiti Sains

Malaysia, 2001.

2. JKKP GP (BM) 04/2003, Manual Kursus Sijil Pegawai Keselamatan dan

Kesihatan. Modul I, Institut Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan Negara,

Malaysia, 2003.

3. Bahari, I., Pengaturan Sendiri dalam Pengurusan Keselamatan dan Kesihatan

http://elib.usm.my/cgi-bin/koha/opac-search.pl?q=pb:CABI%20Publishing,

136

Pekerjaan, Mc-Graw Hill Education, 2002.

4. ILO-OSH, Guideliness on Occupational Safety and Health Management Systems,

2001.

GTK316 Environmental Management

This course introduces students to the important aspects of managing the environment. This

course introduces students to the ISO 14001 environmental management system adopted

at the international level. Students will be explained in detail the need for such standards

and will be trained to provide documentation and conducting internal audits.

Environmental Impact Assessment, Social Impact Assessment and an integrated modelling

and management of the environment will be discussed.


1. Miller G.T., Environmental Science: Working with the Earth, Thompson

Learning Science, 2009.

2. Radojevic, M. & Bashkin, V., Practical Environmental Analysis, Royal Society

of Chemistry, 1999.

3. Cheremisinoff, P.N. & Cheremisinoff, N.P. Professional Environmental

Auditor’s Handbook, William Andrew, 1993.

GTK317 Emergency Response and Planning

This course introduces students to the major accidents and disasters occurred or may occur

in Malaysia, Southeast Asia or worldwide which could affect the environment and workers’

life. Students are also introduced to the concept of disaster prevention and the

establishment of an Emergency Response Plan (ERP) and Emergency Response Team

(ERT). This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and practical. Students will be

assessed through tests, assignments, presentations and the final examination.


1. Leigh, J. P., Markowitz, S., Fahe, M. & Landrigen, P. Costs of Occupational

Injuries and Illnesses (4th Ed.), University of Michigan Press, 2003.

2. Parcell, P., Disaster Prep 101: The Ultimate Guided Emergency Readiness, Info

Quest, 2004.

3. Erickson, P. A. Emergency Response Planning for Corporate and Municipal

Managers, Academic Press, 1999.

4. Greece, S. A., International Resources Guide to Hazardous Chemicals:

Manufacturers, Agencies, Organizations and Sources of Information, William

Andrew Publishing, 2003.

GTK318 Environmental Health Legislation

This course introduces students to the laws related to environment and environmental

health in Malaysia. Various related acts will be introduced. Problems encountered in the

enforcement of these laws are also discussed. This course will be conducted via lectures,

case study and discussion. Students will be assessed through test, discussion, assignments



137

1. Akta Kualilti Alam Sekeliling 1974 (Akta 127) & Peraturan-peraturan dan

Perintah-perintah, ILBS, 2015.

2. Akta Kerajaan Tempatan 1976 (Akta 171) dan Peraturan-peraturannya, ILBS,

2014.

3. Akta Perancangan Bandar dan Desa 1976 (Akta 172) dan Perintah, ILBS, 2014.

4. Akta Jalan, Parit dan Bangunan 1974 (Akta 133), ILBS, 2014.

5. Akta Makanan 1983 (Akta 281) dan Peraturan-pearturannya, ILBS, 2014.

6. Akta Pestisid 1974 (Akta 149) Peraturan dan Perintah, ILBS, 2013.

7. Akta Pencegahan dan Pengawalan Penyakit Berjangkit 1988.

8. Akta Pemusnahan Serangga Pembawa Penyakit 1975.

9. Akta Racun Makhluk Perosak 1974.

GTK319 Pollution Control Technology

This course introduces students to environmental pollution and its impact on health. It also

covers pollution management and the pollutant control strategies by using engineering

technology. Soil, water and chemical pollution in Malaysia will be discussed. Elements of

sustainability and the entire interdisciplinary environment will be discussed, particularly

on the effect of pollution on human health. This course will be conducted via lectures and

other modes of face to face learning. Students will be assessed through assignments,

quizzes, exams, mini project and final examination.


1. Calhoun, Y., Water Pollution, Chelsea House Pub, 2005.

2. Mirsall, A., Soil Pollution: Origin, Monitoring & Remediation, Springer Verlag,

2004.

3. Harisson, R. M., Pollution: Causes, Effects and Control (4th Ed.), Royal Society

of Chemistry, 2001.

4. Frumkin, H., Environmental Health: From Global to Local, John Wiley and Sons,

2005.

GTK320 Environmental and Occupational Toxicology

This course focuses on understanding the effects of toxic chemicals that can harm living

organisms and damage the environment. It discusses the target organ toxicity

(hematotoxicity, neurotoxicity, hepatotoxicity, nephrotoxicity, neurotoxicity,

dermatotoxicity, pulmunotoxicity and reproductive organ toxicity) and chronic toxicity

effects (carcinogenesis, mutagenesis and teratogenesis). The classes of environmental and

occupational toxicants will also be discussed along with the awareness to conserve and

preserve environmental health in sustaining health of living organism in the entire food

chain. Students are given task to seek for alternative methods to reduce production of toxic

waste from multiple sources to the environment. Monitoring of heavy metals in biota will

also be focused. The course will be conducted via lectures, practical sessions, discussion

and field work. Students will be assessed through, assignments, presentation, discussion,

tests, practical report and final examination.


1. Paul, I., Toxicity and Risk: Context, Principles and Practice, Routledge, London,

2001.

2. Clements, W. H., Community Ecotoxicology, John Wiley & Son, 2002.

138

3. Stanley, E. M., Toxicological Chemistry and Biochemistry, Lewis Publication,

2003.

4. Hayes, A. W., Principles and Methods of Toxicology (4th Ed.), Taylor & Francis,

2001.

GTK321 Research Project

This course requires the students to conduct a research in the field of Environmental and

Occupational Health in a period of one academic session, further sharing of research

findings via scientific writing and presentation.


1. Wayne, W. D., Biostatistics, Students and Solutions Manual: A Foundation for

Analysis in the Health Sciences, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2009.

2. Gordis, L., Epidemiology, W. B. Saunders Company, 2009.

Weimer, W. B., Notes of Methodology of Scientific Research, John Wiley &

Sons, 1979

GTN304 Nutrition Research Project I

This course provides the opportunity to the student to prepare nutrition related research

project proposal under the supervision of lecturer. Besides preparing the research project

proposal, this course exposes the students to reference management software and

techniques related to research proposal writing. This course will be conducted by

supervision of research proposal preparation and discussion. Students will be assessed

through research proposal, presentation and discussion.



Research Methods in Health Sciences. Australia: Addison Wesley, Longman,

1999.

2. Montgomery, D.C., Design and Analysis of Experiments (5th Ed.). NY: John

Wiley and Sons, 2000.




students.

GTN305 Advanced Nutrition

This course introduces students to current issues of recent advancements on nutritional

sciences such as concepts and current developments. It also covers application of

nutritional sciences in healthy populations throughout the lifespan to prevent and alleviate

diet- and lifestyle-related diseases. This course will be conducted via lecture and

discussion. Students will be assessed through tests, assignment, reports, discussion and

final examination.

139


1. Contento, I. R., Nutrition Education: Linking Theory, Research, and Practice,

Jones & Bartlett, 2007.

2. Wardlaw, G. M. & Wardlaw, G., Contemporary Nutrition: Issues and Insight with

Foodworks, McGraw-Hill Science/Engineering/Maths, 2000.

3. Nestle, M., Food Politics: How the Food Industry Influences Nutrition and Health,

University of California Press, 2003.

4. Mahan, L. K. & Escott-Stump, S., Krause's Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy (9th

Ed.), 1996.

GTN311 Food Service Management

This course introduces students to the important aspects of catering, planning and food

service management, menu planning, selection of catering equipment, food service system,

and also methods, principles and preparation techniques of nutritious and tasty food in bulk

quantities. It also covers food safety and sanitation, dynamic flows of food from the

purchasing stage up to the serving of patients or clients with stipulated time. This course

will be conducted via lecture, tutorial and discussion session. Students will be assessed

through continuous assessment, assignment and final examination.


1. Byers, B. A., Shanklin, C. W. & Hoover, L. A., Food Service Manual for

Healthcare Institutions (4th Ed.), JB-AHA Publishers, 2004.

2. Knight, J. B. L. & Korschevar, L. H., Quantity Food Production, Planning and

Management, Van Nostrand Reinhold, 2006.

3. Gregoire M. B. & Spears, M. C. Food Service Organization: A Managerial and

Systems Approach (6th Ed.), Prentice Hall, 2006.

GTN319 Food Microbiology

This course introduces students to the role of microorganism in food, identification

methods and classifications, and intrinsic and extrinsic factors which affect the

microorganisms’ growth. It also covers Hazard Analysis Critical Control Point (HACCP),

ISO 22000, ‘Good Manufacturing Practice’ (GMP) and Food Act 1983 which are used in

food industries in Malaysia and other countries. This course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials, practical sessions and discussion. Students will be assessed through test,

assignment, practical reports and final examination.


1. Ray, B., Fundamental Food Microbiology, London: CRC Press, 2008.

2. Abdul Khalil, K., Food Microbiology: A Laboratory Manual, Pusat Penerbitan

Universiti, 2007.

3. Adams, M. R. & Moss, M. O., Food Microbiology (3rd Edition), Cambridge:

Royal Society of Chemistry, 2008.

4. Montville, T. J. & Matthews, K. R., Food Microbiology: An Introduction, ASM

Press, 2008.

140

5. Ahmed, Y., Food Microbiology: A Laboratory Manual, John Wiley & Sons Inc,

2002.

GTN320 Nutrition and Dietetic Community Practicum

This course provides the students opportunities to obtain life-long experiences in the

selected communities. This includes the governmental health care clinics and sport centers,

and non-governmental organisation led institution such as homes for orphanage, old folks

and people with different abilities. The practicum will last for a period of eight weeks with

the aim to encourage engagement of students in conducting health education activities to

educate the community on healthy nutritional habits and lifestyle towards acquiring

optimal nutrition. It also prepares the students to the challenges in societal and career life

after graduation. Students are encouraged to take part in planning, execution and

effectiveness assessment of health education activities. The students will also gather

knowledge about the role of a selected health care institution in community settings. This

course will be conducted via lectures and discussion sessions. Students will be assessed

through assignments, final reports, field supervisor report, presentation, log book and final

examination.


1. Homan, M. S., Promoting Community Change- Making it Happen in the Real

World, Belmont Thompson Higher Education, 2008.

2. Gibney, M. J., Public Health Nutrition, Blackwell Publishers, 2003.

3. Heber, D., Nutrition for Primary Care, Saunders W. B. Co., 2000.

4. Morgan, J. B. & Dickerson, J. W., Nutrition in Early Life, John Wiley & Sons,

2003.

GTP303 Neuropsychology

This course introduces students to the neuropsychology of memory, emotion, perception,

visual recognition, language and recovery of brain function. It is important for the students

to understand the neuropsychological assessment’s result in order to come out with proper

diagnosis for the speech pathology cases. This course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials, and discussion sessions. Student will be assessed through assignments, quizzes,



1. Elias, L. J. & Saucier, D. M., Neuropsychology: Clinical and Experimental

Foundations, Pearson Education Inc., 2006.

2. Martin, G. N., Human Neuropsychology (2nd Ed.), Pearson Education Limited,

2006.

3. Morgan, J. E. & Ricker, J. H., Text Book of Clinical Neuropsychology, Taylor

and Francis Group, 2008.

GTP304 Speech Pathology Clinic III

141

This course trains students to conduct paediatric cases, mostly speech and language cases

under full supervision of a supervisor. Students are required to conduct pre – assessment,

formal and informal assessment, design intervention goals, weekly therapy plan,

conducting therapy sessions, as well as formulating prognosis. This course will be

conducted via clinical sessions and case discussion. Students will be assessed through their

clinical performance, case history report and case presentation.


1. Owens, R. E., Language Disorders: A Functional Approach to Assessment and


2. Philips, B. J., & Ruscello, D. M. Differential Diagnosis in Speech-Language


3. Hedge, M. N., Pocket Guide to Assessment in Speech-Language Pathology,


4. Shipley, K. G., & McAfee, J. G., Assessment in Speech-Language Pathology: A


GTP306 Voice and Resonance Disorders

This course introduces students to the disorders of voice and resonance. It focuses on

several types of voice disorders such as dysphonia and alaryngeal speech, as well as

resonance disorders such as hypernasality and hiponasalitty. The definitions, aetiologies

and characteristics of each type of voice disorders and resonance disorders will be

introduced. This course also discusses the methods of assessment and intervention in

managing individuals with voice disorders and resonance disorders.


1. Boone, D. R., McFarlane, S. C., Von Berg, S. L. & Zraick, R. I., The Voice and

Voice Therapy (8th Ed.), Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2009.

2. Andrews, M. L., Manual of Voice Treatment: Pediatrics through Geriatrics (3rd

Ed.), San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2006.

3. Stemple, J. C., Glaze, L. E., & Klaben, B. G., Clinical Voice Pathology: Theory

and Management (4th Ed.), San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2009.

4. Kummer, A. W., Cleft Palate and Craniofacial Anomalies the Effects on Speech

and Resonance, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2007.

5. Peterson-Falzone, S. J., Hardin-Jones, M. A., & Karnell, M. P., Cleft Palate

Speech (4th Ed.), St. Louis: Mosby, 2009.

GTP311 Counselling for Communication Disorders

This course is a basic counselling course for audiology and speech language pathology

students. It offers a comprehensive knowledge on counselling. Discussion will be

concentrated on issues related to counselling skills, counselling module and effectiveness

of the counselling module. It emphasises specific counselling behaviours to facilitate a

client centred focus and enhance the emotional-affective clinical environment. This course

will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and discussions. Students will be assessed through

quiz, assignment, essay and final examination.


142

1. Flasher, L. V., & Fogel, P. T., Counseling Skills for Speech-language Pathologist

and Audiologist. Albany: Thompson Delmar Learning, 2004.

2. Luterman, D. M., Counseling Persons with Communication Disorders and Their

Families (4th Ed.), Pro-Ed., 2001.

GTP312 Augmentative and Alternative Communication

This course introduces students to the augmentative and alternative communication (AAC)

as a communication method for those who cannot communicate verbally. It also covers

basic knowledge on types and characteristics of augmentative and alternative

communication, assessment techniques, choosing the communication method, and

intervention. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials, and problem based

learning. Students will be assessed through assignment, presentation and final examination.


1. Lloyd, L. L., Fuller, D. R., & Arvidson, H. H., Augmentative and Alternative

Communication: Handbook of Principles and Practices. Boston: Allyn and Bacon,

1997.

2. Beukleman, D. R., & Mirenda, P., Augmentative and Alternative

Communication: Supporting Children and Adults with Complex Communication

Needs, Paul H. Brookes Publishing Co., 2005.

3. Glennon, S. L., & DeCoste, D. C., Handbook of Augmentative and Alternative

Communication, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 1997.

GTP313 Acquired Language Disorders

This is a theoretical course on acquired language disorders. It focuses on aphasia. Topics

on language disorders due to right hemisphere disorders, dementia and traumatic brain

injury will also be covered. The topics covered include definitions, aetiologies and

characteristics of each type of acquired language disorders. Methods of assessment and

intervention in managing individuals with acquired language disorders will be discussed.


1. Hedge, M. N., A Coursebook on Aphasia and Other Neurogenic Language

Disorders (3rd Ed.), San Diego: Delmar Cengage Learning, 2005.

2. Pointe, L. L., Aphasia and Related Neurogenic Language Disorders (3rd Ed.), New

York: Thieme, 2005.

3. Chapey, R., Language Intervention Strategies in Aphasia and Related Neurogenic

Communication Disorders (5th Ed.), Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkings,

2008.

4. Murdoch, B. E., Acquired Speech and Language Disorders: A neuroanatomical and

Functional Neurological Approach (2nd Ed.), West Sussex: John Wiley & Sons Ltd.

2010

GTP314 Motor Speech Disorders

This is a theoretical course on motor speech disorders. It focuses on apraxia of speech and

dysarthria. The definitions, aetiologies and characteristics of motor speech disorders, the

methods of assessment and intervention in managing individuals with motor speech

disorders will be discussed.

143


1. Duffy, J. R., Motor Speech Disorders: Substrates, Differential Diagnosis, and

Management (3rd Ed.), Elsevier Health Sciences, 2012.

2. Freed, D. B., Motor Speech Disorders: Diagnosis & Treatment. Delmar Cengage

Learning, 2011.

3. Maassen, B., Kent, R., Peters, H., Lieshout, P. & Hulstijn, W., Speech Motor

Control in Normal and Disordered Speech, Oxford University Press, 2004.

GTP315 Speech Pathology Clinic IV


under full supervision of a supervisor. Students are required to conduct pre-assessment,




clinical performance, logbook, case history report and case presentation.


1. Philips, B. J. & Ruscello, D. M. Differential Diagnosis in Speech-Language


2. Rhea, P., Introduction to Clinical Methods in Communication Disorders. Paul H.

Brookes Publishing Co., 2002.

3. Meyer, S. M., Survival Guide for the Beginning Speech – Language Clinician,

London: Pro-Ed Inc., 2004.

4. Doyle, J., Practical Audiology for Speech – Language Therapist. London: Whurr

Publisher, 1999.

GTP316 Learning Disabilities

This course exposes students to learning disability and specific learning impairment as well

as the differences between them. It also discusses the theoretical framework of reading and

spelling and its relation to the choice of evaluation and intervention. In addition, this course

emphasises on education issues such as schooling options, selection procedures and school

curriculum for learning disabled children. This course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials, and problem-based learning. Students will be assessed through assignments,

presentations, quiz and final examination.


1. Goldsworthy, C. L., Developmental Reading Disabilities: A Language Based

Treatment Approach (2nd Ed.), Thomson/Delmar Learning, 2003.

2. Gillon, G. T., Phonological Awareness: From Research to Practice, New York:

Guilford Press, 2004

3. Lerner, J. W., Learning Disabilities Theories, Diagnosis, and Teaching Strategies

(8th Ed.), Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2000.

4. Dodge, E. P., The Survival Guide for School-based Speech-Language Pathologist,

San Diego: Singular/Thomson Learning, 2000.

144

GTP317 Swallowing Problems

This course discusses the swallowing problems in paediatric and adult. It also covers

methods of assessment and principles of interventions in managing individuals with

swallowing problems. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials, and practical

session. Students are assessed through assignments, test and final examination.


1. Carrau, R. L. & Murry, T., Comprehensive Management of Swallowing Disorders

(2nd Ed.), Singular Publishing Group, 2006.

2. Cichero, J. & Murdoch, B., Dysphagia: Foundation, Theory and Practice. John

Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2006.

3. Rubin, J. S., Broniatowski, M. & Kelly, J. H., The Swallowing Manual. San

Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 1999.

4. Murry, T. & Carrau, R. L., Clinical Manual for Swallowing Disorders. San Diego:

Singular Publishing Group, 1999.

5. Aevedson, J. C. & Brodsky, L., Pediatric Swallowing and Feeding. San Diego:


GTS317 Sports Management

This course introduces students to the basic sociological and philosophical concepts related

to sport. It also discusses the sociological and philosophical implications of ancient and

modern developments. This course will be conducted via lectures and discussions. Students

will be assessed through test, assignments and final examination.


1. Bucher C. A. & Krotee M. L. Management of Physical Education and Sport (13th

Ed.), New York: McGraw-Hill, 2013.

2. George, F., Greysey, S. A. & Walsh, B., The Business of Sports: Text and Cases

on Strategy and Management, Thomson/South-Western, 2012.

3. Watt, D. C., Sports Management and Administration (2nd Ed.), Oxford: Routledge,

2011.

GTS322 Research Project

The course introduces students to diverse research disciplines pertaining to exercise and

sport science. Students will be engaged in supervised research under the guidance of a

faculty member. They are encouraged to select research topics in sport physiology, sport

psychology, sport nutrition, sport biomechanic and this requires substantial independent

work. The completion of the course will present the students the ability to better understand

research methodologies. The course will also provide a strong science foundation that

emphasises the scientific method and problem solving skills. Students will be assessed

through dissertation, seminar and assignments.


145



1999.






students.

GTX307 Radiation Protection and Safety II

This course is the continuity of Radiation Protection and Safety I course. It provides inputs

theoretically and practically on the application of basic principles in radiation protection

on diagnostic radiology, radiotherapy and nuclear medicine, as well as the researches

involving radiation and radioactive waste management. Teaching and learning activities

for this course is delivered through lectures, tutorials and practical demonstrations.

Students will be assessed through final examination, assignments, continuous assessment

and practical assessment.


1. Statkiewicz, M. A., Visconti, P. J. & Ritenour, R., Radiation Protection in Medical

Radiography (4th Ed.), Mosby Inc, 2002.

2. Lombardi, M. H., Radiation Safety In Nuclear Medicine (2nd Ed.), Taylor &

Francis Group, 2007.

3. Bahari, I. & Ismail, M. Y., Managing Radiation Safety, Atomic Energy Licensing

Board (AELB), McGraw-Hill, 2007.

4. Mohd Ramli, A. A. & Besar, I., Radiation Safety (3rd Ed.), Malaysian Nuclear

Agency, 2008.

5. Podgorsak, E. B., Radiation Oncology Physics, International Atomic Energy

Agency IAEA, 2005.

GTX326 Principles of Radiotherapy

This is an introductory course for the student to the basic principles of radiotherapy which

including basic concept of radiotherapy physics, clinical radiotherapy machine, dose

calculation, treatment planning and modern radiotherapy techniques. This course will be

conducted via lecture, tutorial and seminar. Student will be assessed through test, quiz,



1. Khan, F., The Physics of Radiation Therapy (4th Ed.), Lippincott Williams &

Wilkins, 2009.

2. Washington, C. & Leaver, D., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy (3rd

Ed.), Mosby, 2009.

3. Stanton, R., & Stinson, D., Applied Physics for Radiation Oncology, Medical

Physics Publishing, 2009.

GTX327 Brachytherapy

This course discussed physics and dosimetry aspects of brachytherapy. Radioactive

sources commonly used in brachytherapy and types of brachytherapy will be discussed in

146

this course. The course will be conducted via lecture and tutorial. The students will be

assessed through test, quiz, assignment and final examination.


1. Venselaar, J.L.M., Baltas, D., Ali, S.M., Hoskin, P.J., Comprehensive

Brachytherapy: Physical and Clinical Aspects (1st Ed.). CRC Press, 2013.

2. Symonds, P., Walter and Miller’s Textbook of Radiotherapy: Radiation Physics,

Therapy and Oncology (7th Ed.). Churchill Livingstone/Elsevier Science Limited,

2012.

3. Khan, F. M. The Physics of Radiation Therapy (4th Ed.), Philadelphia: Lippincott

William & Wilkins, 2011.

4. Washington, C. M. & Leaver, D. T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy

(3rd Ed.), St Louis: Mosby, 2010.

GTX328 Diagnostic Radiology Imaging Techniques

This course introduces students to clinical exercise in the hospital pertaining imaging

technique in general radiography, emergency radiography, dental radiography,

fluoroscopy, CT scan, MRI, DSA and mammography. It also covers the procedures on

handling a modality, radiation protection practice, patient care and management, and good

communication skill. In addition to that, the student will attend the radiographic anatomy

lecture during the initial of this course. This course will be conducted via

lecture/practicum/SCL. The students will be assessed through practical assessment, log

book, presentations, practical exercise and final examination.


1. Bontrager, K. L. & Lampignano, J. P., Textbook of Radiographic Positioning and

Related Anatomy (7th Ed.), Elsevier Mosby, 2010.

2. Greathouse, J. S., Radiographic Positioning and Procedures: A Comprehensive

Approach, Delmar Learning, 2006.

3. Carlton R. R & Adler A. M, Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and a

Science (4th Ed.), Delmar Cengage Learning, 2006.

GTX329 Quality Assurance in Diagnostic Radiology

This course provides students with theoretical and practical knowledge in luoroscthe QA

of equipment for diagnostic imaging like general radiography, mammography,

fluoroscopy, interventional fluoroscopy, oral radiography and CT Scan’ at proper

functioning of diagnostic equipment for patient service. Students will be trained good

leadership when doing practical in a group. This course will be conducted via lectures,

practicum and SCL. The students will be assessed through practical reports and practical

assessment.


147

1. Papp, J., Quality Management in the Imaging Sciences (4th Ed.), Mosby Elsevier,

2011.

2. Carlton, R. R. & Adler, A. M., Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and

A Science (4th Ed.), Thomson Delmar Learning, 2006.

3. Stevens, A. T., Quality Management for Radiographic Imaging: A Guide for

Technologist, McGraw Hill, 2001.

4. Fosbinder, R. A. & Kelsey, C. A., Essentials of Radiologic Science, McGraw-Hill

Medical, 2002.

GTX330 Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques

This course give students chances to go through training to handle nuclear medicine

imaging procedures such as 2-dimensional imaging, SPECT (single photon emission

computed tomography) and SPECT/CT. Students also will be trained in nuclear medicine

imaging including preparation of radiopharmaceuticals and quality assurance in nuclear

medicine. Students will be trained to work in a team at Nuclear Medicine Unit and display

good responsibilities and ethical values throughout their training. The course will be

conducted via training at nuclear medicine unit HUSM for the duration of 14 weeks. The

students will be assessed through continuous assessment, log book, clinical test (OSPE)

and presentation.


1. Christian, P. E., Waterstram-Rich, K. M. Nuclear Medicine and PET: Technology

and Techniques (7th Ed.), St Louis: Mosby, 2012.

2. Shackett, P., Nuclear Medicine Technology: Procedures and Quick Reference (2nd

Ed.), Baltimore: Lippincott William and Wilkins, 2010.

3. Sharp, P. F., Gemmell, H. G. & Murray, A. D., Practical Nuclear Medicine (3rd

Ed.), London: Springer, 2005.

4. Bushberg, J. T., Seibert, J. A., Leidholdt, E. M. & Boone, J. M. Essential Physics


5. Pryma, D. A., Nuclear Medicine: Practical Physics, Artifacts and Pitfalls, Oxford

University Press, 2014

GTX331 Quality Assurance in Nuclear Medicine and Radiotherapy

This course provides an intensive practical training for the students regarding routine

quality assurance in radiotherapy and brachytherapy. Students will be trained under the

supervision of clinical and technical personnel on quality assurance and calibration

according to standard protocols. The course will be conducted via practical sessions and

group discussions. Students will be assessed on their attendance, commitments and

laboratory reports.


1. International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), Absorbed Dose Determination in

External Beam Radiotherapy, Vienna: The IAEA TRS 398 2000 Codes of

Practice.

2. Papp, J., Quality Management in the Imaging Sciences (3rd Ed.), Mosby Elsevier,

2011.

148

3. Cherry, S. R., Sorenson, J. & Phelps, M. E., Physics in Nuclear Medicine (3rd Ed.),

Saunders, 2003.

6.5 CORE COURSE LEVEL 4

GTA401 Research Project

This course introduces students to a research project pertaining to the audiological field.

The students are trained to conduct research under the supervision of the faculty members.

They are encouraged to select research topics that are important and current to the

audiological field. The course requires the students to work independently and

professionally while adhering to the ethical standards. Students will be assessed through

research proposal paper, presentation, dissertation and viva.


1. Daniel. W. W., Biostatistics: A Foundation for Analysis in the Health Sciences

(8th Ed.), John Wiley & Sons, 2008.

2. Norman, G. R. & Streiner, D. L., Biostatistics: The Bare Essentials (3rd Ed.),

McGraw-Hill Medical, 2008.

3. Motulsky, H., Intuitive Biostatistics (2nd Ed.), Oxford University Press, 2010.



149

GTA406 Noise and Hearing

This course introduces students to different types of noises, damage risk criteria, noise

exposure guidelines internationally and locally, hearing assessment on noise induced

hearing loss cases and hearing conservation program. It also covers the specific effects of

noise on the auditory and other systems. This course will be conducted via lectures,

tutorials and practical sessions. Students will be assessed through test, presentation,

practical report and final examination.


1. Rawool, V., Hearing Conservation: In Occupational, Recreational, Educational,

and Home Settings, Thieme, 2011.

2. Le Prell, C. G., Henderson, D., Fay, R. R, & Popper, A. N., Noise-Induced

Hearing Loss: Scientific Advances, Springer, 2011.

3. Chasin, M., Hearing Loss in Musicians, Plural Publishing Inc., 2009.



GTA407 Audiology Clinic IV

This course is a continuation from Audiology Clinic l, II and III courses. The students are

attached to USM Audiology Clinic for three days clinic per week and are supervised by

experienced Audiologists for 14 weeks. Apart from conducting history taking and basic

audiological tests as well as procedures related to hearing aids, students are also involved

in performing advanced audiological tests such as electrophysiological tests, site of lesion

tests and non-organic hearing loss tests. Students will also develop skills in dealing with

complex cases, such as difficult to test children, children with multi-disabilities and

patients with non-organic hearing loss. This course will be conducted via clinical

supervision, discussion and PBL. Students will be assessed through supervisor’s

evaluation (practical), report, presentation, log book and final exams. In order to pass this

course, each student must pass the coursework components and final examinations

(Objective Structured Clinical Examination, OSCE and clinical exam) with at least grade

C+.



2015.








GTA408 Audiology Clinical Placement

This course introduces students to clinical audiology practice in selected hospitals in

Malaysia. Students are attached to Audiology Clinic for five days per week and supervised

by experienced Audiologists for six weeks. This clinical training will cover adult and

150

pediatric cases, interviewing session for history taking, routine tests such as otoscopic

examination, tympanometry, acoustic reflex, PTA (with and without masking),

measurement of hearing aid function and explaining results as well as giving counselling

to the patients. This course will be conducted via clinical supervision and discussions.

Students will be assessed through supervisor’s evaluation (practical), reports, presentation

and log book.



2015.

2. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L. & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical


3. Welling, D.R. & Ukstins, C.A., Fundamentals of Audiology for the Speech-





GTA410 Ethics and Professionalism in Audiology

This course introduces the student to professionalism, ethics, clinical audiology practice,

codes of ethics, ethical decision making, beneficence and nonmaleficence, competency and

public statements in audiology. This course will be conducted through lectures, tutorials,

discussions and case studies. Students will be assessed through assignments, presentations



1. Irwin, D. L., Pannbacker, M., Powell, T. W. & Vekovius, G. T., Ethics for Speech-

Language Pathologists and Audiologists: An Illustrative Casebook, Delmar

Cengage Learning, 2006.

2. Lubinski, R. & Hudson, M. W., Professional Issues in Speech-Language

Pathology and Audiology (4th Ed.), Delmar Cengage Learning, 2012.

3. Hosford-Dunn, H., Roeser, R. J. & Valente, M., Audiology Practice Management,

United States of America: Thieme, 2007.

4. Roeser, R. J., Valente, M. & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology Diagnosis, New York:

Thieme, 2007.

5. Katz, J., Medwetsky, L., Burkard, R. & Hood, L., Handbook of Clinical


GTA411 Audiology Clinic V

This course is a continuation from Audiology Clinic I, II, III and IV courses. Students are

attached to USM Audiology Clinic for three days clinic per week and are supervised by

experienced Audiologists for 14 weeks. This clinical training will cover adult and pediatric

cases, interviewing session for history taking, basic tests such as otoscopic examination,

tympanometry, acoustic reflex, PTA (with and without masking), and explaining results to

the clients. Students are also able to handle the procedures related to hearing aids, advanced

151

audiological test (electrophysiology testing, site of lesion tests, tests of non-organic hearing

loss, vestibular testing and tinnitus audiometry) and mapping of adult patients with

cochlear implants and children as well as patients who are difficult to be tested. This course

will be conducted via clinical supervision, discussion and PBL. Students will be assessed

through supervisor’s evaluation (practical), report, presentation, log book and final

examination. In order to pass this course, student must pass the coursework components

and final examinations (Objective Structured Clinical Examination, OSCE and clinical

exam) with at least grade C+.



2015.



3. Welling, D.R. & Ukstins, C.A., Fundamentals of Audiology for the Speech-





GTA413 Practice Management and Seminar in Audiology

This course introduces students to principles of practice management, essential issues in

business administrations, basic managerial accounting, financial management of clinical

practice, human resource and staff management as well as the infection control at

workplace. It covers the applications of information technology at workplace for

Audiology practice. This course also introduces students to the audiology seminar,

evidence-based practice (EBP), including interest, stages of EBP and types of statistics to

answer the question of work practices. This course will be conducted through lectures,

tutorials, discussions and seminar. Students will be assessed through assignments,

presentations and final examination.


1. Hosford-Dunn, H., Roeser, R. J. & Valente, M., Audiology Practice Management,

United States of America: Thieme, 2007.





4. Wong, L. & Hickson, L., Evidence Based Practice in Audiology: Evaluating

Interventions for Children and Adults with Hearing Impairment, San Diego:

Plural Publishing Inc., 2012.

5. Rubin, A., Statistics for Evidence-Based Practice and Evaluation (Research,

Statistics, & Program Evaluation) (3rd Ed.), Brooks Cole, 2012.

GTB408 Biomedical Practicum

This course introduces the students to the best practice in clinical diagnostic laboratory

services for sustainability of health and quality of life. Students will be given opportunities

152

to acquire knowledge and experience as well as to observe, perform, analyse and interpret

the test results. Students will be trained to identify and solve problems in laboratory

services; to implement quality control program; to do troubleshooting and to manage the

diagnostic laboratory. The course will be conducted via practical training and discussion.

The students will be assessed through practical tests, assignments, presentation and

logbook.


1. Willey, J. M., Sherwood, L. M. & Woolverton, C. J., Prescott’s Microbiology (8th

Ed.), McGraw Hill, 2011.

2. Brooks, G. F., Carroll, K. C., Butel, J. S. & Morse, S. A., Jawetz, Melnick and

Adelberg’s Medical Microbiology (25th Ed.), Connecticut: Prentice-Hall

International Inc., 2010.

3. Nester, E. W., Anderson, D. G., Roberts, C. E. & Nester, M. T., Microbiology: A

Human Perspective (6th Ed.), McGraw Hill, 2009.

4. Forbes, B. A., Sahm, D. F. & Weissfeld, A. S., Bailey & Scotts Diagnostic

Microbiology (12th Ed.), Mosby, 2007.

GTB411 Research Project

This course provides the opportunity for the students to carry out biomedicine related

research project under the supervision of a lecturer. It also exposes the students to the best

practice in research as well as occupational health and safety during research project

briefing. This course will be conducted by supervision of research work in the laboratory,

discussion and workshop. Students will be assessed through thesis, presentation and

discussion with supervisor beginning from long break after third year.




1999.



3. Zieger, M., Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers (2nd Ed.), New

York: McGraw-Hill Professionals, 1999.




students.

GTB413 Industrial Training

This course offers a choice for students to gain experiences in a research laboratory or in a

healthcare-based laboratory. In research laboratory, student will be exposed to relevant

practical skills in research. Student will be guided and supervised by the laboratory

researcher in project to be determined by the supervisor. Students who choose to perform

his/her industrial training in clinical/industrial laboratory will get to experience the

153

running, analysis and evaluation of various clinical or industrial tests. Student will also be

exposed to various administrative or management skills in the laboratory.


Text books relevant to the field of clinical/industrial attachment chosen by the students

including those journals in their respective field of specialty.

GTB414 Industrial Attachment

Industrial attachment program will be carried out for 30 weeks throughout the first and

second semester of the final year. The students will be placed at a designated biomedical

industry, where they will be attached in rotation at different units throughout the training

period to allow them to be exposed to the real working environment. Students’ ability to

write a scientific report and critical thinking will be assessed using log book and final

report, while soft skills such as communication, leadership, and professionalism will be

assessed through a supervisor report and presentation.




GTB415 Industrial Research Project

This course provides the opportunity for the students to carry out a biomedicine related

research project under the supervision of appointed industrial scientist. It also exposes the

students to the best practice in research as well as occupational health and safety at industry.

Students will be assessed through industrial thesis, presentation and discussion.




1999.



3. Zieger, M., Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers (2nd Ed.), New

York: McGraw-Hill Professionals, 1999.




students.

GTD409 Research Project in Dietetics II

This course provides the opportunity to the student to carry out dietetics related research

project under the supervision of lecturer. Besides doing the research project, this course

also exposes the students to techniques related to thesis writing. This course will be

conducted by supervision of research work in the laboratory, discussion and fieldwork.

Students will be assessed through thesis, presentation and discussion.

154




1999.






students.

GTD411 Clinical Dietetics Practicum I

This course provides opportunities for the students to observe and provide diet education

to the patients, in the outpatient diet clinic, and give medical nutrition therapy to the

patients with many diseased conditions admitted in the hospital wards and to the patients

with many diseased conditions admitted in the special units. Students will be able to relate

the theory into practice. Practical training will cultivate diet counseling skills among the

students and important skills that are required to become a clinical dietitian.


1. Mahan, L. K. & Escott-Stump, S., Krause’s Food, Nutrition & Diet Therapy (14th


2. Nelms, M., Sucher, K. P., Lacey, K. & Roth, S. L., Nutrition Therapy &

Pathophysiology (2nd Ed.), Wadsworth Publisher Co., 2011.

3. Samour, P. Q & King, K., Pediatric Nutrition, Jones & Bartlet Learning, 2012.

4. Suskind, D. L & Lenssen, P., Pediatric Nutrition Handbook- An Algorithm

Approach, Willey Blackwell, 2011.

GTD412 Clinical Dietetics Practicum II

This internship course is a continuation of Clinical Dietetics Practicum I. The purpose of

this course is to fulfill competency criteria of professional dietetics and to enhance

student’s knowledge and skills regarding standard nutrition care process of medical

nutrition therapy specialized in outpatient dietetics counselling, nutrition intervention in

ward for various medical disciplines including general medical, surgical, intensive care

unit, oncology, renal and pediatric. During the practicum, students need to conduct cases

based on nutrition care process in ward and outpatient clinic, manage enteral nutrition

support and feeding transition, provide patients with nutrition education upon discharge

and perform medical documentation with supervision by clinical instructor. Students will

be assessed through continuous assessment of practicum, practical examination,

presentation and viva voce.


1. Mahan, L. K. & Escott-Stump, S., Krause’s Food, Nutrition & Diet Therapy (14th


2. Shaw, V., Clinical Paediatric Dietetics (4th Ed.), John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2015.

3. Whitney, W., Understanding Normal & Clinical Nutrition (11th Ed.), Wadsworth,

2017.

155

4. Nelms, M., Sucher, K. P., Lacey, K. & Roth, S. L., Nutrition Therapy &

Pathophysiology (2nd Ed.), Wadsworth Publisher Co., 2011.

GTD413 Food Service and Industry Practicum

This course will stress on food service handling in hospitals and institutions and the

relationship between quantitative food production with different menus, equipment,

service staff, time of serving, kitchen sanitation, food preparation and quality assurance.

The main focus is on the practical sessions at hospitals, institutions, industries and major

restaurants. Briefing session will be given during the first week or before the

commencement of internship. The students will undergo internship service for a period of

six to eight weeks in chosen premises. During the attachments, the students are required to

observe the utilisation of equipment, services and food management under supervision of

supervisors.


1. Byers, B. A., Shanklin C. W. & Hoover, L. A., Food Service Manual for



Management, New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 2006.

3. Gregoire M. B. & Spears, M. C., Food Service Organization: A Managerial and


GTF400 Forensic Medicine

This course introduces students to the various kinds of death and its signs, various chemical

transformations taking place after death, post-mortem study, pattern and types of injuries.

It also covers theoretical aspects of the victims dying of unknown causes, killing, suicide,

blunt/sharp force injuries, firearm and explosive injuries, asphyxia, drowning, burns and

electrical shocks. This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorial and discussion.

Students will be assessed through tests, reports, discussion, presentation and final

examination.


1. Saukko P. & Knight B., Knight’s Forensic Pathology (4th Ed.), CRC Press, 2015.

2. Vij, K., Textbook of Forensic Medicine & Toxicology: Principles & Practice,

Elsevier India, 2014.

3. Walters, B. L., Handbook of Autopsy Practice (4th Ed.), Humana Press, 2009.

4. DiMaio V. J. M, Dana S. E., Handbook of Forensic Pathology (2nd Ed.), CRC

Press, 2006.

5. Payne-James J., Busuttil A. & Smock W., Forensic Medicine: Clinical and

Pathological Aspects, Greenwich Medical Media, 2002.

156

GTF402 Ballistics and Explosives Chemistry

This course introduces students to concepts of ballistics and knowledge for ballistic and

explosive investigations. This course also introduces concepts of explosives and various

types of firearms and explosives commonly used by terrorist and criminals. This course is

conducted at Department of Chemistry Malaysia by experts in both disciplines; ballistics

and explosives. This course will be conducted via lectures, discussion and practical.

Students will be assessed through tests, assignments, practical reports, presentation and

final examination.


1. Di Maio V. J. M., Gunshot Wounds: Practical Aspects of Firearms, Ballistics, and

Forensic Techniques (3rd Ed.), CRC Press, 2015.

2. Zukas J. A. & Walters W., Explosive Effects and Applications (Shock Wave and

High Pressure Phenomena), Springer, 2013.

3. Carlucci D. E. & Jacobson S. S., Ballistics - Theory and Design of Guns and

Ammunition (2nd Ed.), CRC Press, 2013.

4. Warlow T., Firearms, the Law, and Forensic Ballistics (3rd Ed.), CRC Press, 2011.

5. Pickett M., Explosives Identification Guide (2nd Ed.), Delmar Cengage Learning,

2004.

GTF407 Forensic Practicum

This course introduces students to training on crime scene management and forensic

examination related to mock crime scenes and moot court which will be conducted at the

Police College and Forensic Laboratory of Royal Malaysia Police in Kuala Lumpur by

qualified police personnel assisted by the forensic experts from the Department of

Chemistry, Petaling Jaya. Students will conduct practical training in the aspect of

fingerprints, ballistics, clandestine laboratory and various chemical and instrumental

analyses. The students will also be taken to real crime scenes and will be explored with

procedures in relation to the search and collection of evidence materials. This course also

provides fundamental knowledge on the Malaysian Legal System and also the police

administration in processing of evidence materials at the Department of Chemistry.

Besides, this course provides detailed knowledge on the report preparation and evidence

presentation before trial. Students will be assessed through test, practical reports,

assignment, presentation, seminar and final examination.


1. Saferstein, R., Criminalistics: An Introduction to Forensic Science (11th Ed.).

Pearson, 2014.

2. Houck M. M. & Siegel J. A., Fundamentals of Forensic Science (2nd Ed.),


3. Jackson, A. R. W. & Jackson, J. M., Forensic Science (2nd Ed.), Pearson, Prentice

Hall, 2008.

GTF408 Forensic Documents Examination

This course introduces students to various techniques to examine sample of forensic

documents. The course will be conducted via lectures and practical sessions by document

157

examination experts from Chemistry Department of Malaysia. Students will be assessed

through tests, assignments, laboratory reports, presentation and final examination.


1. Harralson H. H. & Miller L. S., Huber and Headrick's Handwriting Identification:

Facts and Fundamentals, CRC Press LLC, 2017.

2. Koppenhaven, K. M., Forensic Document Examination: Principles and Practices,

Humana Press, 2007.

3. Kelly, J. S. & Lindblom, B. S., Scientific Examination of Questioned Documents,

CRC Press, 2006.

4. Day, S. P., Ellen D. & Davies C., Scientific Examination of Documents: Methods

and Techniques (3rd Ed.), CRC Press, 2005.

GTF409 Statistics for Forensic Science

This course introduces to students the use of statistics for forensic data interpretation and

common fallacies of prosecutors and defense lawyers. It covers the key statistical

techniques used to evaluate various types of forensic evidence. Real-life examples from

the forensic science literature and forensic case-work are used to illustrate relevant

statistical concepts and methods in areas such as vehicle paint survey data, glass fragment

interpretation, DNA profiling and biochemical matching (e.g. blood stains). This course

will be conducted via lectures and discussion. Students will be assessed through tests,

assignments, discussion, presentation and final examination.


1. Adam, C., Essential Mathematics and Statistics for Forensic Science, Wiley, 2010.

2. Lucy, D., Introductory Statistics for Forensic Scientists, Wiley, 2005.

3. Aitken C. & Taroni F., Statistics and the Evaluation of Evidence for Forensic

Scientists (2nd Ed.), Wiley, 2004.

4. Haigh, J., Taking Chances; Winning with Probability, Oxford University Press,

2003.

GTF410 Forensic Digital Evidence

This course introduces to students the fundamental of digital forensics. It covers the

recovery and handling of digital evidence, investigation approach, device and storage of

digital information. Computer forensic analysis and validation as well as digital crimes will

also be discussed. This course will be conducted via lectures and discussion. Students will

be assessed through tests, quiz, project proposal and final examination.


1. Nelson, B., Phillips A., Steuart C. Guide to Computer Forensics and

Investigations (5th Edition). Course Technology. 2015.

2. Casey, E. Digital Evidence and Computer Crime: Forensic Science, Computers

and the Internet (3rd Edition). Academic Press. 2011.

3. Casey, E. Handbook of Digital Forensics and Investigation. Academic Press. 2009.

4. Marshall, A.M. Digital Forensics: Digital Evidence in Criminal Investigations.

Wiley-Blackwell. 2008.

158

GTF411 Research Project

This course provides the opportunity to the student to carry out biomedicine research

project under the supervision of a lecturer. Besides doing the research project, this course

also exposes the students to reference management software and techniques related to

thesis writing. This course will be conducted by supervision of research work in the

laboratory, discussion and workshop. Students are evaluated through thesis, logbook and

presentation.


1. Thomas, G., How to Do Your Research Project: A Guide for Students, SAGE

Publications Ltd., 2017.

2. Judith, B. & Waters S., Doing Your Research Project: A Guide For First-Time

Researchers (UK Higher Education OUP Humanities & Social Sciences Study

Skills), Open University Press, 2014.

3. Journals and other references based on areas of research.

GTK409 Environmental and Occupational Health Practicum

Through USM-industry collaboration, the students will undergo practicum placement at

selected government agencies or private organisations. Students will learn the actual

working environment in the field of environmental health and occupational safety. The

students will apply knowledge that has been learned to improve their skills and prepare

them to face the real world working environment. Students will be assessed through, log

book, report, presentation and performance.


1. Akta Kualilti Alam Sekeliling 1974 (Akta 127) & Peraturan-peraturan dan

Perintah-perintah, ILBS, 2015.

2. Akta Kerajaan Tempatan 1976 (Akta 171) dan Peraturan-peraturannya, ILBS,

2014.

3. Akta Perancangan Bandar dan Desa 1976 (Akta 172) dan Perintan, ILBS, 2014.

4. Akta Jalan, Parit dan Bangunan 1974 (Akta 133), ILBS, 2014.

5. Akta Makanan 1983 (Akta 281) dan Peraturan-pearturannya, ILBS, 2014.

6. Akta Pestisid 1974 (Akta 149) Peraturan dan Perintah, ILBS, 2013.

7. Akta Pencegahan dan Pengawalan Penyakit Berjangkit 1988.

8. Akta Pemusnahan Serangga Pembawa Penyakit 1975.

9. Akta Racun Makhluk Perosak 1974.

GTN402 Nutrition and Genetics

This course introduces students to component of genetics, nutrigenomics, nutrigenetic and

epigenetics. It also covers aspects related to the above mentioned components with

nutrition metabolism and its effect on nutrition related diseases. This course will be

conducted via lectures and discussion. Students will be assessed through test, discussion,

write-up and final examination.


1. Burdge, G. & Lillycrop, K., Nutrition, Epigenetics and Health. (1st Ed.), World

159

Scientific-New Jersey, 2017.

2. Simopoulos, A. P. & Milner, J. A., Personalized Nutrition: Translating

Nutrigenetic/Nutrigenomic Research into Dietary Guidelines. (1st Ed.), Karger-

Basel, 2010.

3. Niculescu, M. D. & Haggarty-Ames, P., Nutrition in Epigenetics (1st Ed.), Wiley-

Blackwell-Iowa, 2011.

GTN404 Food Security

This course introduces students to the components of food security, food system,

sustainable diet, food safety and sustainable agro-food. It also covers food security policy,

technology, innovation and halal research in food industry. This course will be conducted

via lectures and discussion. Students will be assessed through tests, discussion, project

proposal and final examination.


1. Lawrence, G., Lyons, K. & Wallington, T., Food Security, Nutrition and

Sustainability, Routledge, 2010.

2. Mason, P. & Lang, T., Sustainable Diets: How Ecological Nutrition can

Transform Consumption and the Food System, Routledge, Taylor & Francis

Group, 2017.

3. Galanakis, C. M., Innovation Strategies in Food Industry, Elsevier, 2016.

4. Pond, W. G., Nichols, B. L. & Brown, D. L., Adequate Food for All: Culture,

Science, and Technology of Food in the 21st Century, Boca Raton: CRC, 2009.

5. Brown, L. R., Outgrowing the Earth: The Food Security Challenge in the Age of

Falling Water Tables and Rising Temperatures, W. W. Norton & Company, 2005.

GTN406 Nutrition Practicum

This course provides opportunities for students to experience the real work life in nutrition

field. In this course, student will be placed in institution to undergo industrial practicum in

the industry selected. Briefing session will be conducted in the first week or at the

beginning of the practicum. Students will undergo this industrial practicum for six months

during the last semester of study, and will be supervised by field supervisor. This course

will be conducted via practical and discussion sessions. Students will be assessed through

practicum, report and assignment.


1. Byers, B. A, Shanklin, C. W. & Hoover, L. A., Food Service Manual for



Management, New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 2006.

3. Gregoire M. B. & Spears, M. C., Food Service Organization: A Managerial and


GTN410 Nutrition Research Project II

This course provides the opportunity to the student to carry out nutrition related research

project under the supervision of lecturer. Besides doing the research project, this course

also exposes the students to techniques related to thesis writing. This course will be

160

conducted by supervision of research work in the laboratory, discussion and fieldwork.

Students will be assessed through thesis, presentation and discussion.




1999.






students.

GTP402 Research Project

The course introduces students to diverse research disciplines pertaining to communication

disorders under the guidance of a faculty member. Students are encouraged to select

research topics in normal language development, paediatric language disorders, speech

sound disorders, acquired language disorders, fluency disorders, voice and resonance

disorders, motor-speech disorders, hearing impairment, swallowing problems and also

involve in research collaboration such as in linguistics, psychology, medical and other

habilitation specialisation area, and this requires substantial independent work. The

completion of the course will present the students the ability to better understand research

methodologies. Students will be assessed through dissertation, seminar and assignments.


1. Thomas, G., How to Do Your Research Project: A Guide for Students, SAGE

Publications Ltd., 2017.

2. Weimer, W. B., Notes on the Methodology of Scientific Research, John Wiley &

Sons, 1979.

3. Journals and other references based on areas of research.

GTP408 Fluency Disorders

This course introduces students to fluency disorders including stuttering and cluttering.

Interviewing and investigating processes will be emphasised as well as the assessment and

mode of intervention. This course will be conducted via lectures and problem-based

learning. Students will be assessed through assignments, quizzes, presentation and final

examination.


1. Guitar, B. & McCauley, R. J., Treatment of Stuttering: Established and Emerging

Interventions, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2010.

2. Lees, R. & Stark, C., The Treatment of Stuttering in the Young School-aged

Child. Philadelphia: Whurr, 2005.

3. Ramig, P. R. & Dodge, D. M. The Child and Adolescent Stuttering Treatment and

Activity Resource Guide, Thomson Delmar Learning, 2005.

161

GTP409 Speech Pathology Clinical Placement

This course trains students to conduct cases of communication disorders, acquired

communication disorders, voice, and swallowing difficulties; in a different setting, under

the supervision of a selected supervisor from outside of the university. Students are

required to fully manage the cases and conduct clinical sessions under the supervision of

the supervisor. Students are also expected to show an adequate knowledge and critical

thinking during discussion. This course will be conducted via clinical sessions and case

discussion. Students will be assessed through their clinical performance, log book, case

history report and case presentation.


1. Carrau, R. L. & Murry, T., Comprehensive Management of Swallowing

Disorders, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 1999.

2. Groher, M. E., Dysphagia: Diagnosis and Management. Butterworth-Heinemann,

1997.

3. Logemann, J., Evaluation and Treatment of Swallowing Disorders (2nd Ed.),

Texas: Pro-ed, 1998.

4. Aedvedson, J. C. & Brodsky, L., Pediatric Swallowing and Feeding. San Diego:


5. Wolf, L. S. & Glass, R. P., Feeding and Swallowing Disorders in Infancy:

Assessment and Management, Tuscon: Therapy Skill Builders, 1992.

GTP410 Ethics and Professionalism for Speech Pathology

This course introduces students to the professional aspects as a speech-language therapist.

It also discusses the code of ethics by the professional body and Allied Health Act.


1. Irwin, D., Pannbacker, M., Powell, T. & Vekovius, G., Ethics for Speech-

Language Pathologists and Audiologists. An Illustrative Casebook. Thomson

Delmar Learning, 2007.

2. Body, R., & McAllister, L., Ethics in Speech and Language Therapy, John Wiley

& Sons Ltd., 2009.

3. Corey, G., Corey, M. S. & Callanan, P., Issues and Ethics in the Helping

Profession, Cengage Learning, 2010.

GTP411 Speech Pathology Clinic V








1. Brookshire, R. H., Introduction to Neurogenic Communication Disorders (6th

Ed.), St. Louis: Mosby, 2003.

2. LaPointe, L. L., Aphasia and Related Neurogenic Language Disorders (3rd Ed.),

Thieme, 2005.

162

3. Freed, D. B., Motor Speech Disorders Diagnosis and Treatment, San Diego:


4. Helm-Estabrooks, N., & Holland, A., Approaches to the Treatment of Aphasia,

San Diego: Singular, 1998.

5. Boone, D. R., McFarlene, S. C., & Von Berg, S. L. The Voice and Voice Therapy

(7th Ed.), Allyn & Bacon, 2005.

GTP412 Speech Pathology Clinic VI








1. Carrau, R. L. & Murry, T., Comprehensive Management of Swallowing

Disorders, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 1999.

2. Groher, M. E., Dysphagia: Diagnosis and Management. Butterworth-Heinemann,

1997.

3. Logemann, J., Evaluation and Treatment of Swallowing Disorders (2nd Ed.),

Texas: Pro-ed, 1998.

4. Aedvedson, J. C. & Brodsky, L., Pediatric Swallowing and Feeding. San Diego:


5. Wolf, L. S. & Glass, R. P., Feeding and Swallowing Disorders in Infancy:

Assessment and Management, Tuscon: Therapy Skill Builders, 1992.

GTS411 Industrial Training

This course is a short term training which introduces students to the basic knowledge in

health science that requires the application of technology, psychomotor skills, informatics,

critical and rationale thinking, communication skills, ethic, professionalism, management

skill, entrepreneurship and the involvement in social activity and community service.




GTX408 Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy

This course introduces methods of dose calculation manually for radiotherapy and

procedures and techniques for treatment planning including simulation. Students will be

taught on using computer for generating dose distributions for patient cases. The course

will be conducted via lecture and tutorial. The students will be assessed through test, quiz,

assignment and final examination.



(4th Ed.), Mosby, 2016.

163

2. Jayaramans, S. & Lanzl, L. H., Clinical Radiotherapy Physics (2nd Ed.), Springer-

Verlag, 2004.

3. Khan, F. M. & Gerbi, B. J., Treatment Planning in Radiation Oncology (3rd Ed.),


4. Khan F. M. & Gibbons, J. P., The Physics of Radiation Therapy (5th Ed.),


GTX411 Radiotherapy Techniques

This is a clinical course for the student to learn the practical application of radiotherapy

techniques. Student will participate and developed their skill in clinical radiotherapy which

includes photon beam radiotherapy, electron beam radiotherapy, brachytherapy, dose

calculation and treatment simulation. Student will be assessed through practical test, log

book, case report and presentation.


1. Khan F. M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy (4th Ed.), Lippincott Williams &

Wilkins, 2009.

2. Washington C. & Leaver, D., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy (3rd

Ed.), Mosby, 2009.

3. Stanton, R. & Stinson D., Applied Physics for Radiation Oncology, Medical

Physics Publishing, 2009.

GTX415 Research Project

This course provides opportunities to students to conduct research in radiology, nuclear

medicine, and radiotherapy or radiation protection as the initial exposure to life-long

research. At the same time, students can learn to write their research findings scientifically

as a dissertation that need to be submitted by the end of second semester in the final year.

In this course, students will be trained to manage their projects and plan the preparation of

their dissertations. The students will be assessed through presentation and dissertation.


1. Bushberg J.T., Seibert J.A., Leidholdt E.M. & Boone J.M., The Essential Physics


2. Cherry, S. R., Sorenson, J. A. & Phelps, M. E., Physics in Nuclear Medicine (3rd

Ed.), Saunders, 2003.

3. Washington, C.M. & Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy

(4th Ed.), Mosby, 2016.

4. Khan, F. M. & Gerbi, B. J., Treatment Planning in Radiation Oncology (3rd Ed.),


5. Khan F. M. & Gibbons, J. P., The Physics of Radiation Therapy (5th Ed.),


164

GTX416 Professional Training

This course gives students chances to see the applications of radiation in a working

environment clearly included diagnostic and therapeutic procedures, research and radiation

protection. This includes installation and commissioning of radiation equipment in

hospitals or medical centers by suppliers. Students will be trained to present case study

verbally and to manage case taking and report writing systematically. The students will go

through a 2-month training at government or private hospitals and companies. The students

will be assessed through log book, report and presentation.


1. Hendee W. R. & Ibbott G. S. Radiation Therapy Physics (3rd Ed.), John Wiley and

Sons Inc., 2003.

2. Bushberg, J. T., Seibert, J. A., Leidholdt, E. M. & Boone, J. M., Essential Physics


3. Washington C. M. and Leaver D. T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy

(3rd Ed.), Mosby, 2010.

4. Khan F. M. The Physics of Radiation Therapy (4th Ed.), Lippincott Williams &

Wilkins, 2010.

GTX417 Radiotherapy Treatment Planning Techniques

This course is designed as a clinical course so that the students will be able to learn the

applications of the knowledge obtained from the theoretical courses. Students will

participate and developed their skill in the clinical radiotherapy planning which includes

treatment planning techniques of external beam radiotherapy and brachytherapy. Students

are trained to be competence in using radiotherapy software and also anticipating as a team

member in all aspects of the patient’s management. Students will be assessed based on

technical competence recorded in the log book and practical examination and also

presentation of case studies in a group throughout clinical placement.



(3rd Ed.), Mosby, 2010.

2. Jayaramans, S. & Lanzl, L. H., Clinical Radiotherapy Physics (2nd Ed.), Springer-

Verlag, 2004.

3. Gerbi, B. J. & Khan, F. M., Treatment Planning in Radiation Oncology (3rd Ed.),


4. Khan F. M. & John, P. G., Khan’s The Physics of Radiation Therapy (5th Ed.),


5. Symonds, P., Walter and Miller’s Textbook of Radiotherapy: Radiation Physics,

Therapy and Oncology (7th Ed.), Churchill Livingstone/Elsevier, 2012.

165

6.6 ELECTIVE COURSES

GTJ108/2- Health Communication and Education

This course introduces students to health promotion, education and communication.

Students will be introduced to the concepts and resources particularly concern the role of

health promoter in the context of national health care system. This course will be conducted

via lectures and tutorials. Student will be assessed through assignments, presentation of

reviewed materials from media and final examination.


1. Edelman, C. L., Kudzma, E. C. & Mandle C. L., Health Promotion Throughout

the Life Span (8th Ed.), Elsevier, 2014.

2. Parvanta, C., Nelson, D. E., Parvanta, S. A. & Harne, R. N., Essentials of Public

Health Communication, Jones & Bartlett Learning, 2010.

GEG103/3-Fitness and Health

This course introduces students to theory, principle and method in fitness activities for

health and fitness. Students will learn various methods in evaluating individual’s fitness

level related to their health. Other components such as nutrition, body composition and

mental health are also emphasised. The course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials,

outdoor activities, practicals, and e-learning. Students will be assessed through tests,

assignments, mini project, and final examination.


1. Shakey, B. O. & Brian, J., Fitness and Health (5th Ed.), Champaign: Human

Kinetics, 2002.

2. Edward T. H. & Franks, B. D., Health and Fitness Instructor’s Handbook (4th Ed.),

Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2003.

3. Jackson, A. W., Physical Activity for Health and Fitness, Champaign: Human

Kinetics, 2004.

4. ACMS’s Health Related Physical Fitness Assessment Manual (3rd Ed.),

Philadelphia: Walters Kluwer Health/Lippincot Willims & Wilkings, 2010.

GEG109/2-History of Health Sciences

This course introduces students to the history and development of science and medicine. It

covers historical aspects of Greek philosophy, modern medicine and history of medicine

from the earlier years to the present day. Aspects of social sciences, religion, philosophy

of physical sciences, behavioral sciences, biological sciences and medicine outside of

Europe including the impact of Islam in the field of medicine and health will also be

explored. The course will be conducted via lectures and tutorial. Students will be assessed

through tests, assignments, presentation and final examination.


1. Spector, R. E., Cultural Diversity in Health and Illness, New Jersey: Prentice Hall,

2010.

2. Weiss, G.L. & Lonnquist, L.E., The Sociology of Health, Healing and Illness,

New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2009.

166

3. Bakar, O., Tawhid and Science, Shah Alam: Arah Publication, 2008.

4. Subramanyam, R. R., Mahajan, S., Madhukar, A., Sahay, S. & Roonwal, G.S.,

The Story of Science from Antiquity to the Present, Ullmann Publishing, 2010.

GEG114/2-Oral Health

This course introduces students to the etiology and pathogenesis of common oral diseases

such as caries and periodontal diseases including the preventive strategies. It also covers

oral cancer, malocclusion and dental trauma topics. The course will be conducted through

lectures and tutorial. The students will be assessed through assignments and final

examination.


1. Felton, A., Chapman, A. & Felton, S., Basic Guide to Oral Health Education and

Promotion (2nd Ed.), John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 2014.

2. Murray, J. J., Prevention of Oral Diseases. (4th Ed.), Oxford University Press,

2003.

3. Palmer, C. A., Diet & Nutrition in Oral Health, Pearson/Prentice-Hall, 2003.

4. Wilkins, E. M., Clinical Practice of the Dental Hygienist (9th Ed.), Philadelphia:


GEG201/2-Women’s Health

This course introduces students to the new definition and paradigm of women’s health.

Students will be exposed to a more holistic approach to women’s health not limited to

maternal and child are. Several factors that influence the status of women’s health such as

economic, politics, religion and social cultural practices will be examined. The course will

be conducted via lectures and tutorial. The students will be assessed through assignments,

presentations and final examination.


1. Anandale, E., Women's Health and Social Change, London: Routledge, 2009.

2. The Reader's Digest Association, Women's Health Encyclopedia: An Integrated

Approach to Wellness for Every Season of a Women's Life, 2010.

3. Goldman, M. B., Troisi, R. & Rextrode, K. M., Women’s Health (2nd Ed.),


4. Rosser, S. V., Diversity and Women's Health, Baltimore: Johns Hopkins


GEG204/3-Gender Perspectives in Health

This course introduces students to the framework of analysis to understand the reason for

gender to be an important determinant factor in health. Students will examine the

interaction between gender and other factors in determining health standard, risks and

illness among men and women. The course will also discuss the importance of gender

perspective in forming health policy as well as in the development of health education. The

course will be conducted via lectures and tutorial. The students will be assessed through

their assignments, presentations and final examination.

167


1. Bendelow, G., Gender Health and Healing: The Public and Private Divide,

London: Rutledge, 2002.

2. Schultz, A. J & Mullings, L., Gender, Race, Class and Health: Intersectional

Approaches, San Francisco: Josey Bass, 2006.

3. Bird, C. E. & Rieker, P. P., Gender and Health: The Effects of Constrained

Choices and Social Policies, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2008.

4. Women Health Organization Western Pacific Region, Integrating Poverty and

Gender into Health Programmes, A Source Book for Healthcare Professionals,

Manila Philippines, 2008.

GEG208/2-Human Resource Management in Healthcare Organizations

This course introduces students to the theory and application of Human Resource

Management (HRM) knowledge in the context of healthcare organizations. Students will

be exposed to HRM’s strategic role and function in workforce planning, recruitment,

development and retention of healthcare professionals. At the end of this course, students

are expected to be capable in applying HRM knowledge to improve healthcare services

and manage issues involving healthcare professionals. The course will be conducted via

lectures, self-directed e-learning and discussion of HRM scenarios. Students will be

assessed through individual and group assignments, presentation and final examination.


1. Fried, B. J. & Fottler, M.D., Human Resources in Healthcare: Managing For

Success (4th Ed.), Health Administration Press, 2015.

2. Flynn, W.J., Mathis, R.L, Jackson, J.H. & Valentine, S.R., Healthcare Human

Resource Management (3rd Ed.), Cengage Learning, 2015.

3. Fallon Jr., L. F. & McConnell, C. R., Human Resource Management in Health Care:

Principles and Practices (2nd Ed.), Jones & Bartlett Learning, 2013.

4. Pynes, J.E. & Lombardi, D. N., Human Resources Management for Health Care

Organizations: A Strategic Approach (1st Ed.), Jossey-Bass, 2012.

GEG213/3-Stress Management

This course introduces students to a holistic approach to stress management. It treats both

cognitive (coping) skills and relaxation techniques with the intention of preventing and/or

alleviating the physical symptoms of stress. The course will be conducted via lecture and

discussion. Students will be assessed through test, assignment and final examination.


1. Blonna, R., Coping with Stress in a Changing World (4th Ed.), McGraw-Hill,

2007.

2. Greenburg, J. S., Comprehensive Stress Management (13th Ed.), McGraw-Hill,

2012.

3. Davis, M., Eshelman, E. R. & McKay, M., The Relaxation and Stress Reduction

Workbook (6th Ed.), New Harbinger Publications, 2008.

4. Peterson, C., Work Stress, Taylor & Francis, 2017.

5. Wingo, M., The Impact of the Human Stress Response: The Biologic Origins of

Human Stress, Roxwell Waterhouse, 2016.

168

GEG216/3- Development of Health Services in Malaysia

This course introduces students to the development of health services in Malaysia in the

pre-and post-independence period to date. It provides an understanding of the impact of

political and socioeconomic factors in shaping health status, development of health

services and policies in Malaysia. It will also emphasise on matters pertaining to

Malaysia involvement in international and regional health cooperation as well as medical

and health tourism. The course will be conducted via lecture and tutorial. Students will be

assessed through test, assignment, presentation and final examination.


1. Manderson, L., Sickness and the State: Health and Illness in Colonial Malaya,

1870-1940, Cambridge University Press, 2002.

2. Abdullah, M. D. T., The History of Medicine in Malaysia: The Foundation Years,

Kuala Lumpur: Academy of Medicine in Malaysia, 2005.

3. Ghani, S. N. & Yadav, H., Health Care in Malaysia, Kuala Lumpur: University of

Malaya Press, 2008.

4. Chee, H. L., Health Status and the Development of Health Services in a Colonial

State: The Case of British Malaya, International Journal of Health Services, 1982.

GEG218/3-Community Development in Health Promotion

This course introduces students to the concept of community development as an approach

to improve the health status of individuals and communities within the context of health

promotion. It covers the fundamental elements of community development such as the

needs assessment, capacity building, community empowerment and program evaluation.

The course will be conducted through lectures, tutorial and community visits. Students will

be assessed through assignments, community visit report, presentation and final

examination.


1. Macdowall, W., Bonell, C. & Davies, M., Health Promotion Practice, Open


2. Hubley, J. & Copeman, J., Practical Health Promotion, Polity Press, 2008.

3. Laverack, G., Health Promotion Practice: Building Empowered Communities,

Open University Press, 2007.

4. Doyle E., Susan, W. & Oomen-Early, J., Process of Community Health Education

and Promotion (2nd Ed.), Mayfield Publishing Company, 2009.

GEG219/2 Health Care Management

This course introduces students to the management implications for health professionals

and healthcare organisations. Students will learn to analyse the interactions of health

professionals and examine the influence of management on professionals in healthcare

organisations. Throughout the course, management concepts will be applied to solve

problems involving health professionals and issues affecting healthcare organisations. This

course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and e-learning. Students will be assessed

through tests, assignments, presentation and final examination.


http://www.amazon.com/s/ref=ntt_athr_dp_sr_3/175-1143958-2911161/175-1143958-2911161?_encoding=UTF8&field-author=Jody%20Oomen-Early&ie=UTF8&search-alias=books&sort=relevancerank

169

1. Burns, L. R., Bradley, E. H. & Weiner, B. J., Shortell and Kaluzny’s Healthcare

Management: Organization Design and Behavior (7th Ed.), Delmar Cengage

Learning, 2019.

2. Longest Jr., B.B. & Darr, K., Managing Health Services Organizations and

Systems (6th Ed.), Health Professions Press, 2014.

3. Dunn, R.T., Dunn & Haimann's Healthcare Management (10th Ed.), Health

Administration Pr, 2015.

4. Walshe, K. & Smith, J., Healthcare Management (3rd Ed.), Open University

Press, 2016.

GEG220/2- Occupational Therapy for People with Disability

This course introduces students to occupational therapy profession in terms of its

philosophy, history, ethical and its models, in theory and practice. This course will also

introduce the students on people with disability as well as the process of occupational

therapy assessment and intervention for clients with physical and mental disabilities. The

International Classification of Disability, Health and Functioning (ICF) will also be

introduced. The course will be conducted via lectures, tutorial and community visits.

Students will be assessed through assignments, presentation and final examination.

List of text/referencen books:

1. Willard, H. S., Sparkman, C. S., Crepeau, E. B., Cohn, E. S. & Schell, B. A. B.,

Willard & Spackman’s Occupational Therapy (11th Ed.), Lippincott Williams &

Wilkins, 2009.

2. Radomski, M. V. & Trombly, C. A., Occupational Therapy for Physical

Dysfuntion (6th Ed.), Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2008.

3. Case-Smith, J. & O’Brien, J. C., Occupational Therapy for Children (6th Ed.),

Mosby Elsevier, 2010.

4. Kielhofner, G., Conceptual Foundation of Occupational Therapy Practice (4th

Ed.), F.A. Davis Company, 2009.

GEG302/3-Violence and Society

This course introduces students to the concept and theory of violence in a society. The

interpersonal violence such as violence in family, towards children and the elderly will also

be discussed. This course will be conducted via lecture and discussion. Students will be

assessed through presentation, assigments and final examination.


1. Holmes, S. T. & Holmes R. M, Violence, A Contemporary Reader, New Jersey:

Pearson, 2004.

2. Itzin, C., Home truths About Child Sexual Abuse, London: Rutledge, 2000.

3. Ray, L., Violence and Society, London: Sage Publication, 2011.

4. Silberman, M., Violence and Society A Reader, Upper Saddle River: Prentice

Hall, 2003.

GEG304/2-Communication and Self Development

170

This course introduces students to several communication skills in order to develop their

self image and generate self development. The course also emphasises on public speaking,

handling of interview and presentation of working paper. This course will be conducted

via lectures and tutorials. Students will be assessed through presentation and final

examination.


1. Nelson, P., Titsworth, S. & Pearson, J., iSpeak: Public Speaking for

Contemporary Life, Mc Graw Hill Companies Inc., 2011.

2. Stewards, C. J. & Cash. Jr, W. B., Interviewing: Principles and Practices, Mc

Graw Hill Companies Inc., 2013.

3. Carver, C. S. & Scheier, M. F., Perspectives on Personality (7th Ed.), Pearson

Education Inc., 2011.

4. DeVito, J. A., The Interpersonal Communication Book (14th Ed.), Pearson

Education Inc., 2015.

GEG305/2-Forensic Science

The course introduces students to the fundamental concept of Forensic Sciences. It

provides information on crime scene management and evidence handling. Introductory

topics on Physical Evidence, Forensic Chemistry, Forensic Biology and their related

analysis are also included as part of the syllabus. The course will be conducted via lectures

and tutorial. Students will be assessed through tests, assignments, presentation and final

examination.


1. Houck M. M. & Siegel, J. A. Fundamentals of Forensic Sciences, Elsevier


2. Saferstein, R., Criminalistics: An introduction to Forensic Sciences (8th Ed.),

Prentice-Hall, 2004.

3. James, S. H. & Nordby, J. J., Forensic Sciences: An Introduction to Scientific and

Investigative Techniques, CRC Press, 2003.

4. De Forest, P. R., Gaensslen, R. E. & Lee, H. C., Forensic Sciences; An

Introduction to Criminalistics, New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1983.

GEG309/2-Principles of Forensic Dentistry

This course introduces students to the theory and some practices in forensic dental work

such as bitemark analyses and identification process using dental records. It also covers

disaster victim identification and record management. The course will be conducted via

lecture and tutorial. Students will be assessed through assignment and final examination.


1. Senn, D. R., Weems R. A., Manual of Forensic Odontology (5th Ed.), Boca Raton:

CRC Press, 2013

2. Senn, D, R, Stimson P. G., Forensic Dentistry (2nd Ed.), Boca Raton: CRC Press,

2010.

3. Dorion, B. J., Bitemark evidence: A Colour Atlas and Text (2nd Ed.), Boca Raton:

CRC Press, 2011.

GEG311/2 Botany and Health

171

This course introduces students to the association between plants and health. It covers

history of plant usage in health, plant morphology, taxonomy, basic plant biochemistry,

group of plant active compounds, importance of plant biotechnology, conservation and

preservation of plant resources, ethnobotany and how a health botanical product is derived.

The awareness regarding conservation and preservation of botanical resources will enhance

social responsibility through assignment. Proposal to develop commercial project based

botanical resources could trigger entrepreneurship interest. Chosen topic for presentation

will show the communication skills. The course will be conducted via lectures, and student

centered learning activities. Students will be assessed through test, assignments dan final

examination.


1. Lewis, W., Walter, H. & Elvin-Lewis, P. F. M., Medical Botany: Plants Affecting

Human Health (2nd Ed.), John Wiley & Sons. Inc., 2003.

2. Sneader, W. Drug Discovery: A History, John Wiley & Sons, 2005.

3. Abdullah, H. Kepelbagaian spesies tumbuhan dan pemeliharaannya di Malaysia,

In Haliza A. R. & Rohasliney H., Pemeliharaan dan pemuliharaan alam sekitar di

Malaysia. Penerbit Universiti Sains Malaysia, 2010.

GEG313/2-Health Economics

This course introduces students to the microeconomic and utilisation of healthcare services

as well as its association with issues within the health organization and its deliverable to

the community. Economic evaluation as a basis of healthcare policy making will be

discussed focusing on both individual and community and supply and demand in health

care services. The course will be conducted via lecture and tutorial. Students will be

assessed through assignment, presentation and final examination.


1. Aljunid, S., Ekonomi Kesihatan, Dewan Bahasa & Pustaka Publication 2013.

2. Clewar, A. & Perkins, D., Economics for Health Care Management, New York:


3. Drummond, M.F., Method for the Economy Evaluation of Health Care

Programmes (2nd Ed.), Oxford: Oxford Medical Publication, 1997.

GEG315/3-Fiqh of Health

This course introduces students to the Islamic solution to some issues related to health

sciences. The understanding of the basic formulation of Islamic law will be discussed in

relation to issues raised in the course. The discussion of the issues will be divided into three

categories that are most critical, critical and daily issues. The course will be conducted via

lectures and tutorial. Students will be assessed through tests, assignments, presentation and

final examination.


1. Yusuf Al-Hajj, A., The Islamic Guideline on Medicine, Darussalam, Riyadh:

KSA, 2010.

2. Mohd Yusoff, H., Fikah Perubatan. Selangor, Batu Caves: PTS Millennia, 2011.

172

3. Al-Ashqar, M. S., Ijtihad di dalam Fiqh Perubatan, Kuala Lumpur: Pustakan

Syuhada, 2004.

4. Rahman, R., Kesihatan dan Perubatan dalam Tradisi Islam. Kuala Lumpur:

Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, 1992.

5. Mckenzie, J. F. & Kotecki, P. R. B., An Introduction to Community Health (6th

Ed.), Canada: Jones and Bartlett, 2008.

LAA 100/2 – Arabic Language I

The initial sections of this course emphasise the usage of correct Arabic grammatical forms

for communication purposes. Vocabulary used in daily interactional situations such as in

greetings, introductions, descriptions of common objects andplaces are also introduced.

Writing skills are also given due emphasis through the provision of exercises and through

the enhancement of Arabic via topic‐related textual discussions.


1. Shirwani, H., Build your Arabic Vocabulary. McGraw-Hill, 2007.

2. Kershul, K. K., Arabic in 10 Minutes A Day. Seattle Bilingual Books Inc., 2004.

3. Al-Fauzan, A. E., Husain, M. T. & Muhammad Fadl, M. A., Al-Arabiah Baina

Yadaik, Student’s Book 1. Riyadh, Arabic for All, 2004.

4. Abd Mutholib, H. M., An-Nahu Al-Muyassar, Darul Afaq Al-Arabiah, Kaherah,

2001.

LAA 200/2 – Arabic Language II

This course exposes learners to a wide range of communication skills used in daily

activities. The number of vocabulary items vital for the acquisition of Arabic will be

increased through their application in both conversational and writing tasks. Learners are

introduced to interrogatives and prepositions that form the basis of effective

interaction/dialogue. Grammatical items such as simple sentences using the present and

past tense verb forms are also introduced to enhance communication skills.







2001.

5. Abbas, I., Kamus Al-Jadidi Arab-Melayu, Seri Kota Publications, 2001.

LAA 300/2 – Arabic Language III

This course offers practice in vocabulary usage and in the construction of various sentence

patterns for general and complex communication needs. It also introduces the correct usage

of a variety of sentence structures by providing detailed explanations of past, present and

imperative verb forms. Dialogue practice through a variety of conversational situations

such as during convocation ceremonies, in job interviews, at flight terminals and during

vacations are emphasised upon in all teaching and learning sessions.


173






2001.

5. Abbas, I., Kamus Al-Jadidi Arab-Melayu, Seri Kota Publications, 2001.

LAJ 100/2 - Japanese Language I

This course is an introduction to the Japanese language, Japanese society and its culture.

Learners will distinguish typical Japanese pronunciation and acquire basic grammatical

structures and a range of vocabulary related to communication in everyday situations.

Learners will also identify and display words and sentences in Hiragana, one of the three

writing systems of the Japanese language.


1. Makino, A., Minna no Nihongo Shokyu Choukai Tasuku 25 (Listening

Comprehension Tasks), Japan: 3A Corporation, 2004.

2. Kenichiro, H., Nihongo Takarabune, Japan: ASK, 2004.

3. Michiko, M. & Sachiko, G., Now You’re Talking, Japan: 3A Corporation, 2003.

LAJ 200/2 - Japanese Language II

This course aims to develop elementary proficiency in spoken and written Japanese,

focusing on listening comprehension, speaking, reading, writing, and cultural literacy.

Learners will identify Katakana, one of the three Japanese writing systems, increase basic

grammatical and lexical knowledge, and gain some insight into cultural aspects pertaining

to Japanese society. By the end of the course, learners will be able to express and

understand simple needs in predictable and common situations related to their personal

lives.






LAJ 300/2 - Japanese Language III

This course aims to consolidate learners’ command of Japanese grammatical structures and

their acquisition of vocabulary. While mastering complex sentence structures, learners will

be able to understand and use a variety of basic sentence patterns that will enable them to

enhance their interaction skills as well as their comprehension of conversations. This will

also improve their essay writing skills. About 80 basic Kanji characters will be introduced.


174





GTS202 First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation

This course introduces students with the basic of first aid and CPR for injury treatment. It

also introduces students with the procedure and technique in applying first aid and CPR in

various situations with the emphasis on sports related incidences. This course will be

conducted via lectures and practical demonstrations. Students will be assessed through test,

practical report, practical test, and final examination.


1. Flegel, M., Sport First Aids (5th Ed.), Champaign IL: Human Kinetics, 2014.

2. Austin, M., Crawford, R. & Amstrong, V. J., First Aid Manual: The Authorised

Manual of St. John Ambulance, St. Andrew’s First Aid and The British Red Cross

(10th Ed.), London: Dorling Kindersley, 2014.

3. Thygerson, A. L., Thygerson, S. M., Gulli, B., & Piazza, G., Standard First Aid,

CPR and AED. American College of Emergency Physicians. (6th Ed.), Ontario:


4. American Heart Association, Heartsaver First Aid CPR AED, American Heart

Association Inc., 2016.

GTS207 Principle of Training in Individual and Team Sport

This course introduces students to the principle of structured training based on scientific

method. It also introduces students to the planning in practice and analysis of athlete’s

achievement in sports. This course will be conducted via lectures and tutorials. Students



1. Roderick, R. S. Team Development Games for Trainers, Routledge, 2017.

2. Haywood, K. M. & Lewis, C. F. Archery: Steps to Success, Champaign IL:

Human Kinetic, 2015.

3. Hobbs, M., The Golf Instructor: An Illustrated Guide from Tee to Green, London:

Greenwich Editions, 2012.

GTS212 Applied Sports Physiology

This course introduces students to the physiological changes in the body based on influence

from environment, training method, time and age level. The environmental aspect related

to sport performance including problems during exercise in hot and damp environment,

altitude training, circadian rhythm and jet lag phenomenon will be discussed. This course

will further relate the effects of environmental pollution and safety, microgravity and

water-based activities on sports physiology and performance.


https://www.google.com.my/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22Alton+L.+Thygerson%22

https://www.google.com.my/search?tbo=p&tbm=bks&q=inauthor:%22American+College+of+Emergency+Physicians%22

175

1. Powers, S. K. & Howley, E. T., Exercise Physiology Theory and Application to

Fitness and Performance, McGraw-Hill, 2014.

2. Kenney, W. L., Wilmore, J. H. & Costill, D. L., Physiology of Sport and Exercise

(6th Ed.), Human Kinetics, 2015.

3. Farell P. A, Joyner, M. J. &, Caiozzo, V. J., ACSM's Advanced Exercise

Physiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2011.

4. Reilly, T. & Waterhouse, J., Sport, Exercise and Environmental Physiology,

Elsevier Churchill Livingstone, 2005.

GTS213 Physical Activity, Growth and Development

This course introduces students to issues related to physical growth and development with

regards to physical activity. It also covers the maturation process, morphological and

functional changes in relation to exercise and training. Students will be assessed through

test, assignments, practical reports and final examination.


1. Thies, K. M. & Travers, J. F., Growth and Development through the Lifespan (4th

Ed.), Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2015.

2. Malina, R. M., Bar-Or, O. & Bouchard, C., Growth, Maturation and Physical

Activity (3rd Ed.), Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics. 2012

GTA310 Basic Medical Management for Audiologist and Speech Pathologist

This course introduces students to the aspects of basic human anatomy and physiology and

basic clinical examination that covers the respiratory, cardiovascular and neurology

systems, and special senses (smell, vision and sensation). It also introduces basic laboratory

and radiological investigations and basic treatment options such as pharmacology,

operation, physiotherapy and occupational therapy as well as basic emergency procedures.

This course will be conducted via lectures, tutorials and practical sessions. The students



5. Barbara Herlihy, B., The Human Body in Health and Illness (3rd Ed.),

Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders Company, 2006.

6. Marieb, E. N., Anatomy & Physiology Coloring Workbook: A Complete Study

Guide, (9th Ed.), San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings, 2008.

7. Sembulingam K. & Sembulingam, P. Essentials of Medical Physiology (3rd Ed.).

India: Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers, 2004.

8. Tortora, G. J. & Derrickson, B. H., Principles of Anatomy and Physiology (12 th

Ed.), New York: John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2009.

GTS312 Sports Injuries and Rehabilitation

176

This course introduces students to the types and mechanism of injuries in sports. It also

covers the principles of rehabilitation process including the use of biomechanical skills and

equipment for the treatment and therapies in sports injuries. This course will be conducted

via lectures and practical session that integrate fundamental knowledge with current

research findings. Students will be assessed through tests, practical reports, oral



1. Abrahamson, E. & Comfort, P., Sports Rehabilitation and Injury Prevention,

Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.

2. Buschbacher R. M., Dave S. J. & Prahlow N. D., Sports Medicine and

Rehabilitation: A Sport Specific Approach (2nd Ed.), Lippincott Williams &

Wilkins, 2009.

3. Prentice, W. E., Rehabilitation Technique in Sports Medicine (3rd Ed.), McGraw

Hill, 1999.

4. Selvanetti, A., Giombini, A. & Puddu, G., Rehabilitation of Sports Injuries.

Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2001.

5. Denegar, C.R., Saliba, E. & Saliba, S.F., Therapeutic Modalities for

Musculoskeletal Injuries (3rd Ed.), Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2010.

GTS315 Coaching Science and Sports Performance Analysis

This course introduces students to the essential knowledge related to coaching science such

as management, planning and skills which are required by a trainer/coach. It also covers

the topics on advanced methods of performance analysis in various sports, notational

analysis, the use of software and match statistics. This course will be conducted via lectures

and practical session. Students will be assessed through tests, assignments, reports and final

examination.


1. Hughes, M. & Franks, I. M., Essentials of Performance Analysis in Sport,

Routledge, 2015.

2. Bompa, T.O. & Carlo, B. Periodization Training for Sports (3rd Ed.), Human

Kinetics, 2015.

3. MacMorris, T. & Hale, T., Coaching Science: Theory into Practice, John Wiley

& Sons, 2006.

GTS316 Adapted Physical Activity

This course is designed to impart knowledge and skills about sports and people with

disabilities. Students will be introduced to the conceptual foundation about people with

disabilities, types of people with disabilities, health and fitness, as well as the relationship

of healthy life styles and health conditions. The course further promotes knowledge that

may improve the health and quality of life of people with disabilities, in terms self-help

skills, productivity and psychological through empowerment of people with disabilities in

recreational and physical activities. Students will be assessed through test, assignment,

practical reports and final examination.


177

1. Winnick, J. P., Adapted Physical Education and Sport (5th Ed.), New York:

Human Kinetics, 2011.

2. Kohe, G.Z. & Peters, D. M., High Performance Disability Sport Coaching,

London: Routledge, 2017.

3. Claudine, S., Adapted Physical Activity, Recreation, and Sport: Crossdisciplinary

and Lifespan (6th Ed.), McGraw-Hill, 2004.

4. Thomas, N. & Smith, A., Disability, Sport and Society: An Introduction,

Routledge, 2009.

5. Thompson, W. R. & Vanlandewijck, Y., The Paralympic Athlete: Handbook of

Sports Medicine and Science. Wiley-Blackwell, 2011.

GTS319 Applied Sports Psychology

This course allows students to explore and apply key aspects of sport psychology theory to

enhance athletic performance. Specifically, students will have the opportunity to examine

critically: the differing philosophies of sport psychology practice; the theoretical

underpinning of applied sport psychology interventions; working as a sport psychological

across athletic populations; and the boundaries of sport psychology professional practice.


1. Cox, R., Sport Psychology: Concepts and Applications (5th Ed.), McGraw-Hill,

2002.

2. Gill, D., Psychological Dynamics of Sport, Human Kinetics, 2000.

3. Heil, J., Psychology of Sport Injury. Human Kinetics, 1993.

4. Hemmings, B. & Holder, T., Applied Sport Psychology: A Case-based Approach.

Wiley-Blakwell, 2009.

5. Singer, R.N., Handbook of Sport Psychology (2nd Ed.), John Wiley & Sons Inc.,

2001.

GTS320 Sports Psychophysiology

This course allows students to explore and apply the principles, theories, and applications

of psychophysiological assessment. Specifically, students will have the opportunity to

critically examine the differing philosophies of human psychophysiology with particular

emphasis on psychophysiological correlates and physiological substrates of cognition,

affect, and psychopathology. It also provides an introduction to laboratory techniques and

methodological principles in human psychophysiology. The latter goal will be met through

experiential means with elite athletes.


1. Andreassi, J. L., Psychophysiology: Human Behavior and Physiological

Response. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Publisher, 1995.

2. Gill, D., Psychological Dynamics of Sport, Champaign, Human Kinetics, 2000.

3. Heil, J., Psychology of Sport Injury. Human Kinetics, 1993.

4. Tompson, P. D. Exercise and Sports Cardiology, McGraw Hill International

Publisher, 2001.

5. Williams, J. & Karne, V., Applied Sport Psychology: Personal Growth to Peak

Performance (7th Ed.), McGraw-Hill, 2014.

GTS321 Coaching Psychology

178

This course introduces students to the theoretical knowledge and principles of psychology

including motivation, anxiety, emotion, concentration and attention, as well as attribution.

Planning and designing psychological training sessions using goal setting, imagery,

relaxation and other psychological methods will also be introduced.


1. Burton, D. & Raedeke, T. D., Sport Psychology for Coaches. Human Kinetics,

2008.

2. Williams, J. & Karne, V., Applied Sport Psychology: Personal Growth to Peak

Performance (7th Ed.), McGraw-Hill, 2014.

GTS323 Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription

This course introduces students to the tests to determine fitness level. It also covers the

method in providing exercise prescription for each health and fitness components. This

course will be conducted via lecture and practical. Students will be assessed through test,

practical, lab report and final examination.


1. ACSM, ACSM's Guidelines for Exercise Testing and Prescription (7th Ed.),

Williams & Wilkins, 2015.

2. Nieman, D. C., Exercise Testing & Prescription (6th Ed.), McGraw-Hill, 2007.

3. Swain, D. P. & Leutholtz, B. C., Exercise Prescription: A Case Study Approach

to the ACSM Guidelines (2nd Ed.), Human Kinetics, 2007.

GTS324 Therapeutic Exercise

This course introduces students to the causes, prevalence and incidence of diseases in the

human population and the effects of physical activity on them. It also covers the application

of specific exercise for prevention and treatment of chronic diseases. This course will be

conducted via lectures, practical and discussion. Student will be assessed through tests,

assignments, presentation and final examination.


1. Geoffrey, B. M., Durstine, J. L. & Painter, P. L., ACSM's Exercise Management

for Person's with Chronic Diseases and Disabilities (4th Ed.), Human Kinetics,

2016.

2. Saxton, J., Exercise and Chronic Disease: An Evidence Based Approach,

Routledge, 2013.

3. Ehrman, J. K., Gordon, P. M., Visich, P.S. & Keteyian, S. J., Clinical Exercise

Physiology (3rd Ed.), Human Kinetics, 2013.

GTS410 Contemporary Issue in Sport Practices

179

This course introduces students to the contemporary issues in sports science from local and

worldwide perspectives. It covers current practices, malpractices and development that

occurring in sports science. The course will be conducted via lectures, discussion and

practical sessions. Students will be assessed through presentation, reports, tests and final

examination.


Any books/journals/articles relevant to contemporary issues in sport practices.

180

7.0 FACILITIES

The buildings of School of Health Sciences have facilities such as lecture theatres, tutorial

and seminar rooms together with the latest audio-visual and multimedia equipment.

IT facilities are provided for the use of students at the Multi-Media Laboratories of the

School. It is opened for students during office hours.

All laboratory requirements are provided, complete with instruments and equipment.

Library, hostels and the sports complex with their respective ancillary facilities are

provided for students at the USM Health Campus.

8.0 GENERAL INFORMATION

8.1 CAREER GUIDANCE

It must be emphasised that the examples of jobs and career options given below are not

limited to those mentioned. The curricula which are offered by the School are flexible

enough to provide graduates with skills and abilities which will enable them to prospects

jobs in a wider domain and related areas.

8.1.1 Biomedicine

Science/research officers at research institutes, institutions of higher

learning, hospitals, public and private medical laboratories.

Production and administrative officers in related industries including

Quality Control officers, sales personnel and advisors in the

pharmaceutical, food and beverage industries, suppliers of medical

products and instrumentations and as environmental officers.

Tutors/Lecturers at institutions of higher learning in both private and

public sectors. Graduates can also register as graduate students, or join

the institutions for higher learning.

The examples given above are not restrictive and graduates can also

involve themselves in many areas of scientific or commercial ventures

that is available now or in development particularly in the biotechnology

field.

8.1.2 Dietetics

181

Clinical dietitians, catering dietitians, sport dietitians in government

hospitals, health clinics, private hospitals, wellness centre and

institutions.

Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning and

research.

Tutors at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates

can also register as graduate students and join the institutions of higher

learning.

8.1.3 Forensic Science

Officers at the forensic services of the Royal Malaysia Police,

Department of Chemistry, Fire and Rescue Department, government

hospitals and forensic private agencies.

Science or research officers at research institutes or institutions of higher

learning, private and public hospitals and diagnostic laboratories.

Production, administrative or sales personnel of industries such as

pharmaceuticals, food and beverages, reagent suppliers and biomedical

instrument suppliers as well as environmental officers.

Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher learning.

Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the institutions

of higher learning.

8.1.4 Medical Radiation

Radiation protection officers at government and private hospitals,

research institutions and public and private health organisations.

Personnel involved in commercial activities within the production

industries related to the radiation field and also in the health care

industries.

Science or research officers at institutions of higher education.

Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher education.

Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the institutions

of higher education.

8.1.5 Audiology

182

As audiologists at medical settings (e.g. government and public hospitals,

rehabilitation centres); educational settings (e.g. special education

schools, early intervention centers); or private practice offices.

As academicians (e.g. tutors, lecturers) at public and private institutes of

higher learning.

As researchers at the institutes of higher learning, research laboratories

or centres.

8.1.6 Speech Pathology

Qualified professionals in Speech Pathology are known as Speech-

Language Pathologist or Pegawai Pemulihan Perubatan (Pertuturan) in

the following sectors

- Health sectors (government hospital, private hospital or private

practice)

- Education sectors (special school or normal school)

- Non-government sectors (intervention center or rehabilitation center)

- Community and welfare sectors (community based rehabilitation

center)

Academic staff at the university as clinical supervisors or lecturers (upon

completion of postgraduate degrees at masters/doctor of philosophy

levels)

Researchers and managers in related institutions

8.1.7 Exercise and Sports Science

As science/research/sports officers in medical institutions (e.g.

government and public hospitals, rehabilitation centers, Youth and

Sports Departments); educational settings (e.g. special education schools,

sport schools, early intervention centers, universities); sports institutions

and associations (National Sports Institute, BAM, FAM) or private

practising organisations.

As academicians (e.g. tutors, lecturers) at public and private institutes of

higher learning.

As coaches, sports science consultants, sports administrators and

managers, health coordinators, health club managers in both government

and private sectors.

8.1.8 Nutrition

183

Nutritionists, nutrition product advisor, sports nutritionist in the

government sector and private industries, wellness centres and

institutions.


research institutes.

Tutors at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates can

also register as graduate students and join the institutions of higher

learning.

8.1.9 Environmental and Occupational Health

Safety and health officers, environmental health officers, environmental

control officers, factory and machinery inspectors and safety supervisors.

EMS engineers, EHS executives, health promotion officers and

operation officers.

Training officers, auditors and marketing executives.


research.

Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher learning.

Graduates can also register as graduate students and possibly join as

teaching staff in Higher Education institution.

8.2 PRIZES, AWARDS AND DEAN'S LIST

The School is continually soliciting funds for the setting up of gold medal awards to be

awarded to the best final year students in all programmes as well as funds for other prizes

and awards.

Students obtaining a CGP of 3.67 and above in any semester will receive a Dean's List

Certificate.

8.3 SOCIETY

Students of the School of Health Sciences automatically become the members of the Health

Science Society of the University. Forensic Science Students can also join the Forensic

Science Student Association.

8.4 POSTGRADUATE PROGRAMMES

The School of Health Sciences offers Masters (M.Sc.) and Doctorate (Ph.D.) courses via

coursework (MSc in Sport Science) and mixed mode (MSc in Biomedicine and Forensic

184

Science), as well as research mode in many disciplines such as Biomedicine (e.g.

Diagnostics, neurocognitive science, natural health products, vaccinology, cancer biology,

immune regulations, gene regulations and protein-protein interaction), Forensic Science

(e.g. DNA fingerprinting, Forensic Chemistry, Environmental Forensics and Forensic

Toxicology), Dietetics and Nutrition (e.g. community nutrition, clinical nutrition and

human nutrition) and many others.

Candidates shall have graduated with a Bachelor degree from recognised universities and

obtained a CGPA of at least 2.75 for the Masters programme and 3.67 or graduate with a

Masters for the Ph.D. programme. However students with a CGPA of less than 2.75 may

be considered if they possess appropriate and relevant working experience or experience

in research. Interested candidates can contact the Deputy Dean (Postgraduate, Career and

International) or the USM Institute of Postgraduate Studies for further information.

8.5 OVERSEAS TRAINING SCHEME

Universiti Sains Malaysia offers limited and highly competitive overseas training schemes

to students of levels 100 and 200 who are interested to pursue courses of one semester

duration at any foreign university. This scheme is devised with the purpose of exposing

students to experience studying at the international level with the possibility of credit

transfers. Further details of this scheme can be obtained from the office of International

Relations, Division of Academic and International Affairs, USM.